6d36dfb63ddb60a8fd22779b2af028b9ba22b403
[deliverable/binutils-gdb.git] / ld / ld.texinfo
1 \input texinfo
2 @setfilename ld.info
3 @c Copyright 1991, 1992, 1993, 1994, 1995, 1996, 1997, 1998, 1999, 2000,
4 @c 2001, 2002, 2003, 2004, 2005, 2006, 2007, 2008, 2009
5 @c Free Software Foundation, Inc.
6 @syncodeindex ky cp
7 @c man begin INCLUDE
8 @include configdoc.texi
9 @c (configdoc.texi is generated by the Makefile)
10 @include bfdver.texi
11 @c man end
12
13 @c @smallbook
14
15 @macro gcctabopt{body}
16 @code{\body\}
17 @end macro
18
19 @c man begin NAME
20 @ifset man
21 @c Configure for the generation of man pages
22 @set UsesEnvVars
23 @set GENERIC
24 @set ARM
25 @set H8300
26 @set HPPA
27 @set I960
28 @set M68HC11
29 @set M68K
30 @set MMIX
31 @set MSP430
32 @set POWERPC
33 @set POWERPC64
34 @set Renesas
35 @set SPU
36 @set TICOFF
37 @set WIN32
38 @set XTENSA
39 @end ifset
40 @c man end
41
42 @ifnottex
43 @dircategory Software development
44 @direntry
45 * Ld: (ld). The GNU linker.
46 @end direntry
47 @end ifnottex
48
49 @copying
50 This file documents the @sc{gnu} linker LD
51 @ifset VERSION_PACKAGE
52 @value{VERSION_PACKAGE}
53 @end ifset
54 version @value{VERSION}.
55
56 Copyright @copyright{} 1991, 1992, 1993, 1994, 1995, 1996, 1997, 1998, 1999, 2000,
57 2001, 2002, 2003, 2004, 2005, 2006, 2007, 2008, 2009 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
58
59 Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this document
60 under the terms of the GNU Free Documentation License, Version 1.3
61 or any later version published by the Free Software Foundation;
62 with no Invariant Sections, with no Front-Cover Texts, and with no
63 Back-Cover Texts. A copy of the license is included in the
64 section entitled ``GNU Free Documentation License''.
65 @end copying
66 @iftex
67 @finalout
68 @setchapternewpage odd
69 @settitle The GNU linker
70 @titlepage
71 @title The GNU linker
72 @sp 1
73 @subtitle @code{ld}
74 @ifset VERSION_PACKAGE
75 @subtitle @value{VERSION_PACKAGE}
76 @end ifset
77 @subtitle Version @value{VERSION}
78 @author Steve Chamberlain
79 @author Ian Lance Taylor
80 @page
81
82 @tex
83 {\parskip=0pt
84 \hfill Red Hat Inc\par
85 \hfill nickc\@credhat.com, doc\@redhat.com\par
86 \hfill {\it The GNU linker}\par
87 \hfill Edited by Jeffrey Osier (jeffrey\@cygnus.com)\par
88 }
89 \global\parindent=0pt % Steve likes it this way.
90 @end tex
91
92 @vskip 0pt plus 1filll
93 @c man begin COPYRIGHT
94 Copyright @copyright{} 1991, 1992, 1993, 1994, 1995, 1996, 1997, 1998,
95 1999, 2000, 2001, 2002, 2003, 2004, 2005, 2006, 2007, 2008, 2009 Free
96 Software Foundation, Inc.
97
98 Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this document
99 under the terms of the GNU Free Documentation License, Version 1.3
100 or any later version published by the Free Software Foundation;
101 with no Invariant Sections, with no Front-Cover Texts, and with no
102 Back-Cover Texts. A copy of the license is included in the
103 section entitled ``GNU Free Documentation License''.
104 @c man end
105
106 @end titlepage
107 @end iftex
108 @contents
109 @c FIXME: Talk about importance of *order* of args, cmds to linker!
110
111 @ifnottex
112 @node Top
113 @top LD
114 This file documents the @sc{gnu} linker ld
115 @ifset VERSION_PACKAGE
116 @value{VERSION_PACKAGE}
117 @end ifset
118 version @value{VERSION}.
119
120 This document is distributed under the terms of the GNU Free
121 Documentation License version 1.3. A copy of the license is included
122 in the section entitled ``GNU Free Documentation License''.
123
124 @menu
125 * Overview:: Overview
126 * Invocation:: Invocation
127 * Scripts:: Linker Scripts
128 @ifset GENERIC
129 * Machine Dependent:: Machine Dependent Features
130 @end ifset
131 @ifclear GENERIC
132 @ifset H8300
133 * H8/300:: ld and the H8/300
134 @end ifset
135 @ifset Renesas
136 * Renesas:: ld and other Renesas micros
137 @end ifset
138 @ifset I960
139 * i960:: ld and the Intel 960 family
140 @end ifset
141 @ifset ARM
142 * ARM:: ld and the ARM family
143 @end ifset
144 @ifset HPPA
145 * HPPA ELF32:: ld and HPPA 32-bit ELF
146 @end ifset
147 @ifset M68HC11
148 * M68HC11/68HC12:: ld and the Motorola 68HC11 and 68HC12 families
149 @end ifset
150 @ifset M68K
151 * M68K:: ld and Motorola 68K family
152 @end ifset
153 @ifset POWERPC
154 * PowerPC ELF32:: ld and PowerPC 32-bit ELF Support
155 @end ifset
156 @ifset POWERPC64
157 * PowerPC64 ELF64:: ld and PowerPC64 64-bit ELF Support
158 @end ifset
159 @ifset SPU
160 * SPU ELF:: ld and SPU ELF Support
161 @end ifset
162 @ifset TICOFF
163 * TI COFF:: ld and the TI COFF
164 @end ifset
165 @ifset WIN32
166 * Win32:: ld and WIN32 (cygwin/mingw)
167 @end ifset
168 @ifset XTENSA
169 * Xtensa:: ld and Xtensa Processors
170 @end ifset
171 @end ifclear
172 @ifclear SingleFormat
173 * BFD:: BFD
174 @end ifclear
175 @c Following blank line required for remaining bug in makeinfo conds/menus
176
177 * Reporting Bugs:: Reporting Bugs
178 * MRI:: MRI Compatible Script Files
179 * GNU Free Documentation License:: GNU Free Documentation License
180 * LD Index:: LD Index
181 @end menu
182 @end ifnottex
183
184 @node Overview
185 @chapter Overview
186
187 @cindex @sc{gnu} linker
188 @cindex what is this?
189
190 @ifset man
191 @c man begin SYNOPSIS
192 ld [@b{options}] @var{objfile} @dots{}
193 @c man end
194
195 @c man begin SEEALSO
196 ar(1), nm(1), objcopy(1), objdump(1), readelf(1) and
197 the Info entries for @file{binutils} and
198 @file{ld}.
199 @c man end
200 @end ifset
201
202 @c man begin DESCRIPTION
203
204 @command{ld} combines a number of object and archive files, relocates
205 their data and ties up symbol references. Usually the last step in
206 compiling a program is to run @command{ld}.
207
208 @command{ld} accepts Linker Command Language files written in
209 a superset of AT&T's Link Editor Command Language syntax,
210 to provide explicit and total control over the linking process.
211
212 @ifset man
213 @c For the man only
214 This man page does not describe the command language; see the
215 @command{ld} entry in @code{info} for full details on the command
216 language and on other aspects of the GNU linker.
217 @end ifset
218
219 @ifclear SingleFormat
220 This version of @command{ld} uses the general purpose BFD libraries
221 to operate on object files. This allows @command{ld} to read, combine, and
222 write object files in many different formats---for example, COFF or
223 @code{a.out}. Different formats may be linked together to produce any
224 available kind of object file. @xref{BFD}, for more information.
225 @end ifclear
226
227 Aside from its flexibility, the @sc{gnu} linker is more helpful than other
228 linkers in providing diagnostic information. Many linkers abandon
229 execution immediately upon encountering an error; whenever possible,
230 @command{ld} continues executing, allowing you to identify other errors
231 (or, in some cases, to get an output file in spite of the error).
232
233 @c man end
234
235 @node Invocation
236 @chapter Invocation
237
238 @c man begin DESCRIPTION
239
240 The @sc{gnu} linker @command{ld} is meant to cover a broad range of situations,
241 and to be as compatible as possible with other linkers. As a result,
242 you have many choices to control its behavior.
243
244 @c man end
245
246 @ifset UsesEnvVars
247 @menu
248 * Options:: Command Line Options
249 * Environment:: Environment Variables
250 @end menu
251
252 @node Options
253 @section Command Line Options
254 @end ifset
255
256 @cindex command line
257 @cindex options
258
259 @c man begin OPTIONS
260
261 The linker supports a plethora of command-line options, but in actual
262 practice few of them are used in any particular context.
263 @cindex standard Unix system
264 For instance, a frequent use of @command{ld} is to link standard Unix
265 object files on a standard, supported Unix system. On such a system, to
266 link a file @code{hello.o}:
267
268 @smallexample
269 ld -o @var{output} /lib/crt0.o hello.o -lc
270 @end smallexample
271
272 This tells @command{ld} to produce a file called @var{output} as the
273 result of linking the file @code{/lib/crt0.o} with @code{hello.o} and
274 the library @code{libc.a}, which will come from the standard search
275 directories. (See the discussion of the @samp{-l} option below.)
276
277 Some of the command-line options to @command{ld} may be specified at any
278 point in the command line. However, options which refer to files, such
279 as @samp{-l} or @samp{-T}, cause the file to be read at the point at
280 which the option appears in the command line, relative to the object
281 files and other file options. Repeating non-file options with a
282 different argument will either have no further effect, or override prior
283 occurrences (those further to the left on the command line) of that
284 option. Options which may be meaningfully specified more than once are
285 noted in the descriptions below.
286
287 @cindex object files
288 Non-option arguments are object files or archives which are to be linked
289 together. They may follow, precede, or be mixed in with command-line
290 options, except that an object file argument may not be placed between
291 an option and its argument.
292
293 Usually the linker is invoked with at least one object file, but you can
294 specify other forms of binary input files using @samp{-l}, @samp{-R},
295 and the script command language. If @emph{no} binary input files at all
296 are specified, the linker does not produce any output, and issues the
297 message @samp{No input files}.
298
299 If the linker cannot recognize the format of an object file, it will
300 assume that it is a linker script. A script specified in this way
301 augments the main linker script used for the link (either the default
302 linker script or the one specified by using @samp{-T}). This feature
303 permits the linker to link against a file which appears to be an object
304 or an archive, but actually merely defines some symbol values, or uses
305 @code{INPUT} or @code{GROUP} to load other objects. Specifying a
306 script in this way merely augments the main linker script, with the
307 extra commands placed after the main script; use the @samp{-T} option
308 to replace the default linker script entirely, but note the effect of
309 the @code{INSERT} command. @xref{Scripts}.
310
311 For options whose names are a single letter,
312 option arguments must either follow the option letter without intervening
313 whitespace, or be given as separate arguments immediately following the
314 option that requires them.
315
316 For options whose names are multiple letters, either one dash or two can
317 precede the option name; for example, @samp{-trace-symbol} and
318 @samp{--trace-symbol} are equivalent. Note---there is one exception to
319 this rule. Multiple letter options that start with a lower case 'o' can
320 only be preceded by two dashes. This is to reduce confusion with the
321 @samp{-o} option. So for example @samp{-omagic} sets the output file
322 name to @samp{magic} whereas @samp{--omagic} sets the NMAGIC flag on the
323 output.
324
325 Arguments to multiple-letter options must either be separated from the
326 option name by an equals sign, or be given as separate arguments
327 immediately following the option that requires them. For example,
328 @samp{--trace-symbol foo} and @samp{--trace-symbol=foo} are equivalent.
329 Unique abbreviations of the names of multiple-letter options are
330 accepted.
331
332 Note---if the linker is being invoked indirectly, via a compiler driver
333 (e.g. @samp{gcc}) then all the linker command line options should be
334 prefixed by @samp{-Wl,} (or whatever is appropriate for the particular
335 compiler driver) like this:
336
337 @smallexample
338 gcc -Wl,--start-group foo.o bar.o -Wl,--end-group
339 @end smallexample
340
341 This is important, because otherwise the compiler driver program may
342 silently drop the linker options, resulting in a bad link. Confusion
343 may also arise when passing options that require values through a
344 driver, as the use of a space between option and argument acts as
345 a separator, and causes the driver to pass only the option to the linker
346 and the argument to the compiler. In this case, it is simplest to use
347 the joined forms of both single- and multiple-letter options, such as:
348
349 @smallexample
350 gcc foo.o bar.o -Wl,-eENTRY -Wl,-Map=a.map
351 @end smallexample
352
353 Here is a table of the generic command line switches accepted by the GNU
354 linker:
355
356 @table @gcctabopt
357 @include at-file.texi
358
359 @kindex -a @var{keyword}
360 @item -a @var{keyword}
361 This option is supported for HP/UX compatibility. The @var{keyword}
362 argument must be one of the strings @samp{archive}, @samp{shared}, or
363 @samp{default}. @samp{-aarchive} is functionally equivalent to
364 @samp{-Bstatic}, and the other two keywords are functionally equivalent
365 to @samp{-Bdynamic}. This option may be used any number of times.
366
367 @kindex --audit @var{AUDITLIB}
368 @item --audit @var{AUDITLIB}
369 Adds @var{AUDITLIB} to the @code{DT_AUDIT} entry of the dynamic section.
370 @var{AUDITLIB} is not checked for existence, nor will it use the DT_SONAME
371 specified in the library. If specified multiple times @code{DT_AUDIT}
372 will contain a colon separated list of audit interfaces to use. If the linker
373 finds an object with an audit entry while searching for shared libraries,
374 it will add a corresponding @code{DT_DEPAUDIT} entry in the output file.
375 This option is only meaningful on ELF platforms supporting the rtld-audit
376 interface.
377
378 @ifset I960
379 @cindex architectures
380 @kindex -A @var{arch}
381 @item -A @var{architecture}
382 @kindex --architecture=@var{arch}
383 @itemx --architecture=@var{architecture}
384 In the current release of @command{ld}, this option is useful only for the
385 Intel 960 family of architectures. In that @command{ld} configuration, the
386 @var{architecture} argument identifies the particular architecture in
387 the 960 family, enabling some safeguards and modifying the
388 archive-library search path. @xref{i960,,@command{ld} and the Intel 960
389 family}, for details.
390
391 Future releases of @command{ld} may support similar functionality for
392 other architecture families.
393 @end ifset
394
395 @ifclear SingleFormat
396 @cindex binary input format
397 @kindex -b @var{format}
398 @kindex --format=@var{format}
399 @cindex input format
400 @cindex input format
401 @item -b @var{input-format}
402 @itemx --format=@var{input-format}
403 @command{ld} may be configured to support more than one kind of object
404 file. If your @command{ld} is configured this way, you can use the
405 @samp{-b} option to specify the binary format for input object files
406 that follow this option on the command line. Even when @command{ld} is
407 configured to support alternative object formats, you don't usually need
408 to specify this, as @command{ld} should be configured to expect as a
409 default input format the most usual format on each machine.
410 @var{input-format} is a text string, the name of a particular format
411 supported by the BFD libraries. (You can list the available binary
412 formats with @samp{objdump -i}.)
413 @xref{BFD}.
414
415 You may want to use this option if you are linking files with an unusual
416 binary format. You can also use @samp{-b} to switch formats explicitly (when
417 linking object files of different formats), by including
418 @samp{-b @var{input-format}} before each group of object files in a
419 particular format.
420
421 The default format is taken from the environment variable
422 @code{GNUTARGET}.
423 @ifset UsesEnvVars
424 @xref{Environment}.
425 @end ifset
426 You can also define the input format from a script, using the command
427 @code{TARGET};
428 @ifclear man
429 see @ref{Format Commands}.
430 @end ifclear
431 @end ifclear
432
433 @kindex -c @var{MRI-cmdfile}
434 @kindex --mri-script=@var{MRI-cmdfile}
435 @cindex compatibility, MRI
436 @item -c @var{MRI-commandfile}
437 @itemx --mri-script=@var{MRI-commandfile}
438 For compatibility with linkers produced by MRI, @command{ld} accepts script
439 files written in an alternate, restricted command language, described in
440 @ifclear man
441 @ref{MRI,,MRI Compatible Script Files}.
442 @end ifclear
443 @ifset man
444 the MRI Compatible Script Files section of GNU ld documentation.
445 @end ifset
446 Introduce MRI script files with
447 the option @samp{-c}; use the @samp{-T} option to run linker
448 scripts written in the general-purpose @command{ld} scripting language.
449 If @var{MRI-cmdfile} does not exist, @command{ld} looks for it in the directories
450 specified by any @samp{-L} options.
451
452 @cindex common allocation
453 @kindex -d
454 @kindex -dc
455 @kindex -dp
456 @item -d
457 @itemx -dc
458 @itemx -dp
459 These three options are equivalent; multiple forms are supported for
460 compatibility with other linkers. They assign space to common symbols
461 even if a relocatable output file is specified (with @samp{-r}). The
462 script command @code{FORCE_COMMON_ALLOCATION} has the same effect.
463 @xref{Miscellaneous Commands}.
464
465 @kindex --depaudit @var{AUDITLIB}
466 @kindex -P @var{AUDITLIB}
467 @item --depaudit @var{AUDITLIB}
468 @itemx -P @var{AUDITLIB}
469 Adds @var{AUDITLIB} to the @code{DT_DEPAUDIT} entry of the dynamic section.
470 @var{AUDITLIB} is not checked for existence, nor will it use the DT_SONAME
471 specified in the library. If specified multiple times @code{DT_DEPAUDIT}
472 will contain a colon separated list of audit interfaces to use. This
473 option is only meaningful on ELF platforms supporting the rtld-audit interface.
474 The -P option is provided for Solaris compatibility.
475
476 @cindex entry point, from command line
477 @kindex -e @var{entry}
478 @kindex --entry=@var{entry}
479 @item -e @var{entry}
480 @itemx --entry=@var{entry}
481 Use @var{entry} as the explicit symbol for beginning execution of your
482 program, rather than the default entry point. If there is no symbol
483 named @var{entry}, the linker will try to parse @var{entry} as a number,
484 and use that as the entry address (the number will be interpreted in
485 base 10; you may use a leading @samp{0x} for base 16, or a leading
486 @samp{0} for base 8). @xref{Entry Point}, for a discussion of defaults
487 and other ways of specifying the entry point.
488
489 @kindex --exclude-libs
490 @item --exclude-libs @var{lib},@var{lib},...
491 Specifies a list of archive libraries from which symbols should not be automatically
492 exported. The library names may be delimited by commas or colons. Specifying
493 @code{--exclude-libs ALL} excludes symbols in all archive libraries from
494 automatic export. This option is available only for the i386 PE targeted
495 port of the linker and for ELF targeted ports. For i386 PE, symbols
496 explicitly listed in a .def file are still exported, regardless of this
497 option. For ELF targeted ports, symbols affected by this option will
498 be treated as hidden.
499
500 @kindex --exclude-modules-for-implib
501 @item --exclude-modules-for-implib @var{module},@var{module},...
502 Specifies a list of object files or archive members, from which symbols
503 should not be automatically exported, but which should be copied wholesale
504 into the import library being generated during the link. The module names
505 may be delimited by commas or colons, and must match exactly the filenames
506 used by @command{ld} to open the files; for archive members, this is simply
507 the member name, but for object files the name listed must include and
508 match precisely any path used to specify the input file on the linker's
509 command-line. This option is available only for the i386 PE targeted port
510 of the linker. Symbols explicitly listed in a .def file are still exported,
511 regardless of this option.
512
513 @cindex dynamic symbol table
514 @kindex -E
515 @kindex --export-dynamic
516 @kindex --no-export-dynamic
517 @item -E
518 @itemx --export-dynamic
519 @itemx --no-export-dynamic
520 When creating a dynamically linked executable, using the @option{-E}
521 option or the @option{--export-dynamic} option causes the linker to add
522 all symbols to the dynamic symbol table. The dynamic symbol table is the
523 set of symbols which are visible from dynamic objects at run time.
524
525 If you do not use either of these options (or use the
526 @option{--no-export-dynamic} option to restore the default behavior), the
527 dynamic symbol table will normally contain only those symbols which are
528 referenced by some dynamic object mentioned in the link.
529
530 If you use @code{dlopen} to load a dynamic object which needs to refer
531 back to the symbols defined by the program, rather than some other
532 dynamic object, then you will probably need to use this option when
533 linking the program itself.
534
535 You can also use the dynamic list to control what symbols should
536 be added to the dynamic symbol table if the output format supports it.
537 See the description of @samp{--dynamic-list}.
538
539 Note that this option is specific to ELF targeted ports. PE targets
540 support a similar function to export all symbols from a DLL or EXE; see
541 the description of @samp{--export-all-symbols} below.
542
543 @ifclear SingleFormat
544 @cindex big-endian objects
545 @cindex endianness
546 @kindex -EB
547 @item -EB
548 Link big-endian objects. This affects the default output format.
549
550 @cindex little-endian objects
551 @kindex -EL
552 @item -EL
553 Link little-endian objects. This affects the default output format.
554 @end ifclear
555
556 @kindex -f @var{name}
557 @kindex --auxiliary=@var{name}
558 @item -f @var{name}
559 @itemx --auxiliary=@var{name}
560 When creating an ELF shared object, set the internal DT_AUXILIARY field
561 to the specified name. This tells the dynamic linker that the symbol
562 table of the shared object should be used as an auxiliary filter on the
563 symbol table of the shared object @var{name}.
564
565 If you later link a program against this filter object, then, when you
566 run the program, the dynamic linker will see the DT_AUXILIARY field. If
567 the dynamic linker resolves any symbols from the filter object, it will
568 first check whether there is a definition in the shared object
569 @var{name}. If there is one, it will be used instead of the definition
570 in the filter object. The shared object @var{name} need not exist.
571 Thus the shared object @var{name} may be used to provide an alternative
572 implementation of certain functions, perhaps for debugging or for
573 machine specific performance.
574
575 This option may be specified more than once. The DT_AUXILIARY entries
576 will be created in the order in which they appear on the command line.
577
578 @kindex -F @var{name}
579 @kindex --filter=@var{name}
580 @item -F @var{name}
581 @itemx --filter=@var{name}
582 When creating an ELF shared object, set the internal DT_FILTER field to
583 the specified name. This tells the dynamic linker that the symbol table
584 of the shared object which is being created should be used as a filter
585 on the symbol table of the shared object @var{name}.
586
587 If you later link a program against this filter object, then, when you
588 run the program, the dynamic linker will see the DT_FILTER field. The
589 dynamic linker will resolve symbols according to the symbol table of the
590 filter object as usual, but it will actually link to the definitions
591 found in the shared object @var{name}. Thus the filter object can be
592 used to select a subset of the symbols provided by the object
593 @var{name}.
594
595 Some older linkers used the @option{-F} option throughout a compilation
596 toolchain for specifying object-file format for both input and output
597 object files.
598 @ifclear SingleFormat
599 The @sc{gnu} linker uses other mechanisms for this purpose: the
600 @option{-b}, @option{--format}, @option{--oformat} options, the
601 @code{TARGET} command in linker scripts, and the @code{GNUTARGET}
602 environment variable.
603 @end ifclear
604 The @sc{gnu} linker will ignore the @option{-F} option when not
605 creating an ELF shared object.
606
607 @cindex finalization function
608 @kindex -fini=@var{name}
609 @item -fini=@var{name}
610 When creating an ELF executable or shared object, call NAME when the
611 executable or shared object is unloaded, by setting DT_FINI to the
612 address of the function. By default, the linker uses @code{_fini} as
613 the function to call.
614
615 @kindex -g
616 @item -g
617 Ignored. Provided for compatibility with other tools.
618
619 @kindex -G @var{value}
620 @kindex --gpsize=@var{value}
621 @cindex object size
622 @item -G @var{value}
623 @itemx --gpsize=@var{value}
624 Set the maximum size of objects to be optimized using the GP register to
625 @var{size}. This is only meaningful for object file formats such as
626 MIPS ECOFF which supports putting large and small objects into different
627 sections. This is ignored for other object file formats.
628
629 @cindex runtime library name
630 @kindex -h @var{name}
631 @kindex -soname=@var{name}
632 @item -h @var{name}
633 @itemx -soname=@var{name}
634 When creating an ELF shared object, set the internal DT_SONAME field to
635 the specified name. When an executable is linked with a shared object
636 which has a DT_SONAME field, then when the executable is run the dynamic
637 linker will attempt to load the shared object specified by the DT_SONAME
638 field rather than the using the file name given to the linker.
639
640 @kindex -i
641 @cindex incremental link
642 @item -i
643 Perform an incremental link (same as option @samp{-r}).
644
645 @cindex initialization function
646 @kindex -init=@var{name}
647 @item -init=@var{name}
648 When creating an ELF executable or shared object, call NAME when the
649 executable or shared object is loaded, by setting DT_INIT to the address
650 of the function. By default, the linker uses @code{_init} as the
651 function to call.
652
653 @cindex archive files, from cmd line
654 @kindex -l @var{namespec}
655 @kindex --library=@var{namespec}
656 @item -l @var{namespec}
657 @itemx --library=@var{namespec}
658 Add the archive or object file specified by @var{namespec} to the
659 list of files to link. This option may be used any number of times.
660 If @var{namespec} is of the form @file{:@var{filename}}, @command{ld}
661 will search the library path for a file called @var{filename}, otherwise it
662 will search the library path for a file called @file{lib@var{namespec}.a}.
663
664 On systems which support shared libraries, @command{ld} may also search for
665 files other than @file{lib@var{namespec}.a}. Specifically, on ELF
666 and SunOS systems, @command{ld} will search a directory for a library
667 called @file{lib@var{namespec}.so} before searching for one called
668 @file{lib@var{namespec}.a}. (By convention, a @code{.so} extension
669 indicates a shared library.) Note that this behavior does not apply
670 to @file{:@var{filename}}, which always specifies a file called
671 @var{filename}.
672
673 The linker will search an archive only once, at the location where it is
674 specified on the command line. If the archive defines a symbol which
675 was undefined in some object which appeared before the archive on the
676 command line, the linker will include the appropriate file(s) from the
677 archive. However, an undefined symbol in an object appearing later on
678 the command line will not cause the linker to search the archive again.
679
680 See the @option{-(} option for a way to force the linker to search
681 archives multiple times.
682
683 You may list the same archive multiple times on the command line.
684
685 @ifset GENERIC
686 This type of archive searching is standard for Unix linkers. However,
687 if you are using @command{ld} on AIX, note that it is different from the
688 behaviour of the AIX linker.
689 @end ifset
690
691 @cindex search directory, from cmd line
692 @kindex -L @var{dir}
693 @kindex --library-path=@var{dir}
694 @item -L @var{searchdir}
695 @itemx --library-path=@var{searchdir}
696 Add path @var{searchdir} to the list of paths that @command{ld} will search
697 for archive libraries and @command{ld} control scripts. You may use this
698 option any number of times. The directories are searched in the order
699 in which they are specified on the command line. Directories specified
700 on the command line are searched before the default directories. All
701 @option{-L} options apply to all @option{-l} options, regardless of the
702 order in which the options appear. @option{-L} options do not affect
703 how @command{ld} searches for a linker script unless @option{-T}
704 option is specified.
705
706 If @var{searchdir} begins with @code{=}, then the @code{=} will be replaced
707 by the @dfn{sysroot prefix}, a path specified when the linker is configured.
708
709 @ifset UsesEnvVars
710 The default set of paths searched (without being specified with
711 @samp{-L}) depends on which emulation mode @command{ld} is using, and in
712 some cases also on how it was configured. @xref{Environment}.
713 @end ifset
714
715 The paths can also be specified in a link script with the
716 @code{SEARCH_DIR} command. Directories specified this way are searched
717 at the point in which the linker script appears in the command line.
718
719 @cindex emulation
720 @kindex -m @var{emulation}
721 @item -m @var{emulation}
722 Emulate the @var{emulation} linker. You can list the available
723 emulations with the @samp{--verbose} or @samp{-V} options.
724
725 If the @samp{-m} option is not used, the emulation is taken from the
726 @code{LDEMULATION} environment variable, if that is defined.
727
728 Otherwise, the default emulation depends upon how the linker was
729 configured.
730
731 @cindex link map
732 @kindex -M
733 @kindex --print-map
734 @item -M
735 @itemx --print-map
736 Print a link map to the standard output. A link map provides
737 information about the link, including the following:
738
739 @itemize @bullet
740 @item
741 Where object files are mapped into memory.
742 @item
743 How common symbols are allocated.
744 @item
745 All archive members included in the link, with a mention of the symbol
746 which caused the archive member to be brought in.
747 @item
748 The values assigned to symbols.
749
750 Note - symbols whose values are computed by an expression which
751 involves a reference to a previous value of the same symbol may not
752 have correct result displayed in the link map. This is because the
753 linker discards intermediate results and only retains the final value
754 of an expression. Under such circumstances the linker will display
755 the final value enclosed by square brackets. Thus for example a
756 linker script containing:
757
758 @smallexample
759 foo = 1
760 foo = foo * 4
761 foo = foo + 8
762 @end smallexample
763
764 will produce the following output in the link map if the @option{-M}
765 option is used:
766
767 @smallexample
768 0x00000001 foo = 0x1
769 [0x0000000c] foo = (foo * 0x4)
770 [0x0000000c] foo = (foo + 0x8)
771 @end smallexample
772
773 See @ref{Expressions} for more information about expressions in linker
774 scripts.
775 @end itemize
776
777 @kindex -n
778 @cindex read-only text
779 @cindex NMAGIC
780 @kindex --nmagic
781 @item -n
782 @itemx --nmagic
783 Turn off page alignment of sections, and disable linking against shared
784 libraries. If the output format supports Unix style magic numbers,
785 mark the output as @code{NMAGIC}.
786
787 @kindex -N
788 @kindex --omagic
789 @cindex read/write from cmd line
790 @cindex OMAGIC
791 @item -N
792 @itemx --omagic
793 Set the text and data sections to be readable and writable. Also, do
794 not page-align the data segment, and disable linking against shared
795 libraries. If the output format supports Unix style magic numbers,
796 mark the output as @code{OMAGIC}. Note: Although a writable text section
797 is allowed for PE-COFF targets, it does not conform to the format
798 specification published by Microsoft.
799
800 @kindex --no-omagic
801 @cindex OMAGIC
802 @item --no-omagic
803 This option negates most of the effects of the @option{-N} option. It
804 sets the text section to be read-only, and forces the data segment to
805 be page-aligned. Note - this option does not enable linking against
806 shared libraries. Use @option{-Bdynamic} for this.
807
808 @kindex -o @var{output}
809 @kindex --output=@var{output}
810 @cindex naming the output file
811 @item -o @var{output}
812 @itemx --output=@var{output}
813 Use @var{output} as the name for the program produced by @command{ld}; if this
814 option is not specified, the name @file{a.out} is used by default. The
815 script command @code{OUTPUT} can also specify the output file name.
816
817 @kindex -O @var{level}
818 @cindex generating optimized output
819 @item -O @var{level}
820 If @var{level} is a numeric values greater than zero @command{ld} optimizes
821 the output. This might take significantly longer and therefore probably
822 should only be enabled for the final binary. At the moment this
823 option only affects ELF shared library generation. Future releases of
824 the linker may make more use of this option. Also currently there is
825 no difference in the linker's behaviour for different non-zero values
826 of this option. Again this may change with future releases.
827
828 @kindex -q
829 @kindex --emit-relocs
830 @cindex retain relocations in final executable
831 @item -q
832 @itemx --emit-relocs
833 Leave relocation sections and contents in fully linked executables.
834 Post link analysis and optimization tools may need this information in
835 order to perform correct modifications of executables. This results
836 in larger executables.
837
838 This option is currently only supported on ELF platforms.
839
840 @kindex --force-dynamic
841 @cindex forcing the creation of dynamic sections
842 @item --force-dynamic
843 Force the output file to have dynamic sections. This option is specific
844 to VxWorks targets.
845
846 @cindex partial link
847 @cindex relocatable output
848 @kindex -r
849 @kindex --relocatable
850 @item -r
851 @itemx --relocatable
852 Generate relocatable output---i.e., generate an output file that can in
853 turn serve as input to @command{ld}. This is often called @dfn{partial
854 linking}. As a side effect, in environments that support standard Unix
855 magic numbers, this option also sets the output file's magic number to
856 @code{OMAGIC}.
857 @c ; see @option{-N}.
858 If this option is not specified, an absolute file is produced. When
859 linking C++ programs, this option @emph{will not} resolve references to
860 constructors; to do that, use @samp{-Ur}.
861
862 When an input file does not have the same format as the output file,
863 partial linking is only supported if that input file does not contain any
864 relocations. Different output formats can have further restrictions; for
865 example some @code{a.out}-based formats do not support partial linking
866 with input files in other formats at all.
867
868 This option does the same thing as @samp{-i}.
869
870 @kindex -R @var{file}
871 @kindex --just-symbols=@var{file}
872 @cindex symbol-only input
873 @item -R @var{filename}
874 @itemx --just-symbols=@var{filename}
875 Read symbol names and their addresses from @var{filename}, but do not
876 relocate it or include it in the output. This allows your output file
877 to refer symbolically to absolute locations of memory defined in other
878 programs. You may use this option more than once.
879
880 For compatibility with other ELF linkers, if the @option{-R} option is
881 followed by a directory name, rather than a file name, it is treated as
882 the @option{-rpath} option.
883
884 @kindex -s
885 @kindex --strip-all
886 @cindex strip all symbols
887 @item -s
888 @itemx --strip-all
889 Omit all symbol information from the output file.
890
891 @kindex -S
892 @kindex --strip-debug
893 @cindex strip debugger symbols
894 @item -S
895 @itemx --strip-debug
896 Omit debugger symbol information (but not all symbols) from the output file.
897
898 @kindex -t
899 @kindex --trace
900 @cindex input files, displaying
901 @item -t
902 @itemx --trace
903 Print the names of the input files as @command{ld} processes them.
904
905 @kindex -T @var{script}
906 @kindex --script=@var{script}
907 @cindex script files
908 @item -T @var{scriptfile}
909 @itemx --script=@var{scriptfile}
910 Use @var{scriptfile} as the linker script. This script replaces
911 @command{ld}'s default linker script (rather than adding to it), so
912 @var{commandfile} must specify everything necessary to describe the
913 output file. @xref{Scripts}. If @var{scriptfile} does not exist in
914 the current directory, @code{ld} looks for it in the directories
915 specified by any preceding @samp{-L} options. Multiple @samp{-T}
916 options accumulate.
917
918 @kindex -dT @var{script}
919 @kindex --default-script=@var{script}
920 @cindex script files
921 @item -dT @var{scriptfile}
922 @itemx --default-script=@var{scriptfile}
923 Use @var{scriptfile} as the default linker script. @xref{Scripts}.
924
925 This option is similar to the @option{--script} option except that
926 processing of the script is delayed until after the rest of the
927 command line has been processed. This allows options placed after the
928 @option{--default-script} option on the command line to affect the
929 behaviour of the linker script, which can be important when the linker
930 command line cannot be directly controlled by the user. (eg because
931 the command line is being constructed by another tool, such as
932 @samp{gcc}).
933
934 @kindex -u @var{symbol}
935 @kindex --undefined=@var{symbol}
936 @cindex undefined symbol
937 @item -u @var{symbol}
938 @itemx --undefined=@var{symbol}
939 Force @var{symbol} to be entered in the output file as an undefined
940 symbol. Doing this may, for example, trigger linking of additional
941 modules from standard libraries. @samp{-u} may be repeated with
942 different option arguments to enter additional undefined symbols. This
943 option is equivalent to the @code{EXTERN} linker script command.
944
945 @kindex -Ur
946 @cindex constructors
947 @item -Ur
948 For anything other than C++ programs, this option is equivalent to
949 @samp{-r}: it generates relocatable output---i.e., an output file that can in
950 turn serve as input to @command{ld}. When linking C++ programs, @samp{-Ur}
951 @emph{does} resolve references to constructors, unlike @samp{-r}.
952 It does not work to use @samp{-Ur} on files that were themselves linked
953 with @samp{-Ur}; once the constructor table has been built, it cannot
954 be added to. Use @samp{-Ur} only for the last partial link, and
955 @samp{-r} for the others.
956
957 @kindex --unique[=@var{SECTION}]
958 @item --unique[=@var{SECTION}]
959 Creates a separate output section for every input section matching
960 @var{SECTION}, or if the optional wildcard @var{SECTION} argument is
961 missing, for every orphan input section. An orphan section is one not
962 specifically mentioned in a linker script. You may use this option
963 multiple times on the command line; It prevents the normal merging of
964 input sections with the same name, overriding output section assignments
965 in a linker script.
966
967 @kindex -v
968 @kindex -V
969 @kindex --version
970 @cindex version
971 @item -v
972 @itemx --version
973 @itemx -V
974 Display the version number for @command{ld}. The @option{-V} option also
975 lists the supported emulations.
976
977 @kindex -x
978 @kindex --discard-all
979 @cindex deleting local symbols
980 @item -x
981 @itemx --discard-all
982 Delete all local symbols.
983
984 @kindex -X
985 @kindex --discard-locals
986 @cindex local symbols, deleting
987 @item -X
988 @itemx --discard-locals
989 Delete all temporary local symbols. (These symbols start with
990 system-specific local label prefixes, typically @samp{.L} for ELF systems
991 or @samp{L} for traditional a.out systems.)
992
993 @kindex -y @var{symbol}
994 @kindex --trace-symbol=@var{symbol}
995 @cindex symbol tracing
996 @item -y @var{symbol}
997 @itemx --trace-symbol=@var{symbol}
998 Print the name of each linked file in which @var{symbol} appears. This
999 option may be given any number of times. On many systems it is necessary
1000 to prepend an underscore.
1001
1002 This option is useful when you have an undefined symbol in your link but
1003 don't know where the reference is coming from.
1004
1005 @kindex -Y @var{path}
1006 @item -Y @var{path}
1007 Add @var{path} to the default library search path. This option exists
1008 for Solaris compatibility.
1009
1010 @kindex -z @var{keyword}
1011 @item -z @var{keyword}
1012 The recognized keywords are:
1013 @table @samp
1014
1015 @item combreloc
1016 Combines multiple reloc sections and sorts them to make dynamic symbol
1017 lookup caching possible.
1018
1019 @item defs
1020 Disallows undefined symbols in object files. Undefined symbols in
1021 shared libraries are still allowed.
1022
1023 @item execstack
1024 Marks the object as requiring executable stack.
1025
1026 @item initfirst
1027 This option is only meaningful when building a shared object.
1028 It marks the object so that its runtime initialization will occur
1029 before the runtime initialization of any other objects brought into
1030 the process at the same time. Similarly the runtime finalization of
1031 the object will occur after the runtime finalization of any other
1032 objects.
1033
1034 @item interpose
1035 Marks the object that its symbol table interposes before all symbols
1036 but the primary executable.
1037
1038 @item lazy
1039 When generating an executable or shared library, mark it to tell the
1040 dynamic linker to defer function call resolution to the point when
1041 the function is called (lazy binding), rather than at load time.
1042 Lazy binding is the default.
1043
1044 @item loadfltr
1045 Marks the object that its filters be processed immediately at
1046 runtime.
1047
1048 @item muldefs
1049 Allows multiple definitions.
1050
1051 @item nocombreloc
1052 Disables multiple reloc sections combining.
1053
1054 @item nocopyreloc
1055 Disables production of copy relocs.
1056
1057 @item nodefaultlib
1058 Marks the object that the search for dependencies of this object will
1059 ignore any default library search paths.
1060
1061 @item nodelete
1062 Marks the object shouldn't be unloaded at runtime.
1063
1064 @item nodlopen
1065 Marks the object not available to @code{dlopen}.
1066
1067 @item nodump
1068 Marks the object can not be dumped by @code{dldump}.
1069
1070 @item noexecstack
1071 Marks the object as not requiring executable stack.
1072
1073 @item norelro
1074 Don't create an ELF @code{PT_GNU_RELRO} segment header in the object.
1075
1076 @item now
1077 When generating an executable or shared library, mark it to tell the
1078 dynamic linker to resolve all symbols when the program is started, or
1079 when the shared library is linked to using dlopen, instead of
1080 deferring function call resolution to the point when the function is
1081 first called.
1082
1083 @item origin
1084 Marks the object may contain $ORIGIN.
1085
1086 @item relro
1087 Create an ELF @code{PT_GNU_RELRO} segment header in the object.
1088
1089 @item max-page-size=@var{value}
1090 Set the emulation maximum page size to @var{value}.
1091
1092 @item common-page-size=@var{value}
1093 Set the emulation common page size to @var{value}.
1094
1095 @end table
1096
1097 Other keywords are ignored for Solaris compatibility.
1098
1099 @kindex -(
1100 @cindex groups of archives
1101 @item -( @var{archives} -)
1102 @itemx --start-group @var{archives} --end-group
1103 The @var{archives} should be a list of archive files. They may be
1104 either explicit file names, or @samp{-l} options.
1105
1106 The specified archives are searched repeatedly until no new undefined
1107 references are created. Normally, an archive is searched only once in
1108 the order that it is specified on the command line. If a symbol in that
1109 archive is needed to resolve an undefined symbol referred to by an
1110 object in an archive that appears later on the command line, the linker
1111 would not be able to resolve that reference. By grouping the archives,
1112 they all be searched repeatedly until all possible references are
1113 resolved.
1114
1115 Using this option has a significant performance cost. It is best to use
1116 it only when there are unavoidable circular references between two or
1117 more archives.
1118
1119 @kindex --accept-unknown-input-arch
1120 @kindex --no-accept-unknown-input-arch
1121 @item --accept-unknown-input-arch
1122 @itemx --no-accept-unknown-input-arch
1123 Tells the linker to accept input files whose architecture cannot be
1124 recognised. The assumption is that the user knows what they are doing
1125 and deliberately wants to link in these unknown input files. This was
1126 the default behaviour of the linker, before release 2.14. The default
1127 behaviour from release 2.14 onwards is to reject such input files, and
1128 so the @samp{--accept-unknown-input-arch} option has been added to
1129 restore the old behaviour.
1130
1131 @kindex --as-needed
1132 @kindex --no-as-needed
1133 @item --as-needed
1134 @itemx --no-as-needed
1135 This option affects ELF DT_NEEDED tags for dynamic libraries mentioned
1136 on the command line after the @option{--as-needed} option. Normally
1137 the linker will add a DT_NEEDED tag for each dynamic library mentioned
1138 on the command line, regardless of whether the library is actually
1139 needed or not. @option{--as-needed} causes a DT_NEEDED tag to only be
1140 emitted for a library that satisfies an undefined symbol reference
1141 from a regular object file or, if the library is not found in the
1142 DT_NEEDED lists of other libraries linked up to that point, an
1143 undefined symbol reference from another dynamic library.
1144 @option{--no-as-needed} restores the default behaviour.
1145
1146 @kindex --add-needed
1147 @kindex --no-add-needed
1148 @item --add-needed
1149 @itemx --no-add-needed
1150 These two options have been deprecated because of the similarity of
1151 their names to the @option{--as-needed} and @option{--no-as-needed}
1152 options. They have been replaced by @option{--copy-dt-needed-entries}
1153 and @option{--no-copy-dt-needed-entries}.
1154
1155 @kindex -assert @var{keyword}
1156 @item -assert @var{keyword}
1157 This option is ignored for SunOS compatibility.
1158
1159 @kindex -Bdynamic
1160 @kindex -dy
1161 @kindex -call_shared
1162 @item -Bdynamic
1163 @itemx -dy
1164 @itemx -call_shared
1165 Link against dynamic libraries. This is only meaningful on platforms
1166 for which shared libraries are supported. This option is normally the
1167 default on such platforms. The different variants of this option are
1168 for compatibility with various systems. You may use this option
1169 multiple times on the command line: it affects library searching for
1170 @option{-l} options which follow it.
1171
1172 @kindex -Bgroup
1173 @item -Bgroup
1174 Set the @code{DF_1_GROUP} flag in the @code{DT_FLAGS_1} entry in the dynamic
1175 section. This causes the runtime linker to handle lookups in this
1176 object and its dependencies to be performed only inside the group.
1177 @option{--unresolved-symbols=report-all} is implied. This option is
1178 only meaningful on ELF platforms which support shared libraries.
1179
1180 @kindex -Bstatic
1181 @kindex -dn
1182 @kindex -non_shared
1183 @kindex -static
1184 @item -Bstatic
1185 @itemx -dn
1186 @itemx -non_shared
1187 @itemx -static
1188 Do not link against shared libraries. This is only meaningful on
1189 platforms for which shared libraries are supported. The different
1190 variants of this option are for compatibility with various systems. You
1191 may use this option multiple times on the command line: it affects
1192 library searching for @option{-l} options which follow it. This
1193 option also implies @option{--unresolved-symbols=report-all}. This
1194 option can be used with @option{-shared}. Doing so means that a
1195 shared library is being created but that all of the library's external
1196 references must be resolved by pulling in entries from static
1197 libraries.
1198
1199 @kindex -Bsymbolic
1200 @item -Bsymbolic
1201 When creating a shared library, bind references to global symbols to the
1202 definition within the shared library, if any. Normally, it is possible
1203 for a program linked against a shared library to override the definition
1204 within the shared library. This option is only meaningful on ELF
1205 platforms which support shared libraries.
1206
1207 @kindex -Bsymbolic-functions
1208 @item -Bsymbolic-functions
1209 When creating a shared library, bind references to global function
1210 symbols to the definition within the shared library, if any.
1211 This option is only meaningful on ELF platforms which support shared
1212 libraries.
1213
1214 @kindex --dynamic-list=@var{dynamic-list-file}
1215 @item --dynamic-list=@var{dynamic-list-file}
1216 Specify the name of a dynamic list file to the linker. This is
1217 typically used when creating shared libraries to specify a list of
1218 global symbols whose references shouldn't be bound to the definition
1219 within the shared library, or creating dynamically linked executables
1220 to specify a list of symbols which should be added to the symbol table
1221 in the executable. This option is only meaningful on ELF platforms
1222 which support shared libraries.
1223
1224 The format of the dynamic list is the same as the version node without
1225 scope and node name. See @ref{VERSION} for more information.
1226
1227 @kindex --dynamic-list-data
1228 @item --dynamic-list-data
1229 Include all global data symbols to the dynamic list.
1230
1231 @kindex --dynamic-list-cpp-new
1232 @item --dynamic-list-cpp-new
1233 Provide the builtin dynamic list for C++ operator new and delete. It
1234 is mainly useful for building shared libstdc++.
1235
1236 @kindex --dynamic-list-cpp-typeinfo
1237 @item --dynamic-list-cpp-typeinfo
1238 Provide the builtin dynamic list for C++ runtime type identification.
1239
1240 @kindex --check-sections
1241 @kindex --no-check-sections
1242 @item --check-sections
1243 @itemx --no-check-sections
1244 Asks the linker @emph{not} to check section addresses after they have
1245 been assigned to see if there are any overlaps. Normally the linker will
1246 perform this check, and if it finds any overlaps it will produce
1247 suitable error messages. The linker does know about, and does make
1248 allowances for sections in overlays. The default behaviour can be
1249 restored by using the command line switch @option{--check-sections}.
1250 Section overlap is not usually checked for relocatable links. You can
1251 force checking in that case by using the @option{--check-sections}
1252 option.
1253
1254 @kindex --copy-dt-needed-entries
1255 @kindex --no-copy-dt-needed-entries
1256 @item --copy-dt-needed-entries
1257 @itemx --no-copy-dt-needed-entries
1258 This option affects the treatment of dynamic libraries referred to
1259 by DT_NEEDED tags @emph{inside} ELF dynamic libraries mentioned on the
1260 command line. Normally the linker will add a DT_NEEDED tag to the
1261 output binary for each library mentioned in a DT_NEEDED tag in an
1262 input dynamic library. With @option{--no-copy-dt-needed-entries}
1263 specified on the command line however any dynamic libraries that
1264 follow it will have their DT_NEEDED entries ignored. The default
1265 behaviour can be restored with @option{--copy-dt-needed-entries}.
1266
1267 This option also has an effect on the resolution of symbols in dynamic
1268 libraries. With the default setting dynamic libraries mentioned on
1269 the command line will be recursively searched, following their
1270 DT_NEEDED tags to other libraries, in order to resolve symbols
1271 required by the output binary. With
1272 @option{--no-copy-dt-needed-entries} specified however the searching
1273 of dynamic libraries that follow it will stop with the dynamic
1274 library itself. No DT_NEEDED links will be traversed to resolve
1275 symbols.
1276
1277 @cindex cross reference table
1278 @kindex --cref
1279 @item --cref
1280 Output a cross reference table. If a linker map file is being
1281 generated, the cross reference table is printed to the map file.
1282 Otherwise, it is printed on the standard output.
1283
1284 The format of the table is intentionally simple, so that it may be
1285 easily processed by a script if necessary. The symbols are printed out,
1286 sorted by name. For each symbol, a list of file names is given. If the
1287 symbol is defined, the first file listed is the location of the
1288 definition. The remaining files contain references to the symbol.
1289
1290 @cindex common allocation
1291 @kindex --no-define-common
1292 @item --no-define-common
1293 This option inhibits the assignment of addresses to common symbols.
1294 The script command @code{INHIBIT_COMMON_ALLOCATION} has the same effect.
1295 @xref{Miscellaneous Commands}.
1296
1297 The @samp{--no-define-common} option allows decoupling
1298 the decision to assign addresses to Common symbols from the choice
1299 of the output file type; otherwise a non-Relocatable output type
1300 forces assigning addresses to Common symbols.
1301 Using @samp{--no-define-common} allows Common symbols that are referenced
1302 from a shared library to be assigned addresses only in the main program.
1303 This eliminates the unused duplicate space in the shared library,
1304 and also prevents any possible confusion over resolving to the wrong
1305 duplicate when there are many dynamic modules with specialized search
1306 paths for runtime symbol resolution.
1307
1308 @cindex symbols, from command line
1309 @kindex --defsym=@var{symbol}=@var{exp}
1310 @item --defsym=@var{symbol}=@var{expression}
1311 Create a global symbol in the output file, containing the absolute
1312 address given by @var{expression}. You may use this option as many
1313 times as necessary to define multiple symbols in the command line. A
1314 limited form of arithmetic is supported for the @var{expression} in this
1315 context: you may give a hexadecimal constant or the name of an existing
1316 symbol, or use @code{+} and @code{-} to add or subtract hexadecimal
1317 constants or symbols. If you need more elaborate expressions, consider
1318 using the linker command language from a script (@pxref{Assignments,,
1319 Assignment: Symbol Definitions}). @emph{Note:} there should be no white
1320 space between @var{symbol}, the equals sign (``@key{=}''), and
1321 @var{expression}.
1322
1323 @cindex demangling, from command line
1324 @kindex --demangle[=@var{style}]
1325 @kindex --no-demangle
1326 @item --demangle[=@var{style}]
1327 @itemx --no-demangle
1328 These options control whether to demangle symbol names in error messages
1329 and other output. When the linker is told to demangle, it tries to
1330 present symbol names in a readable fashion: it strips leading
1331 underscores if they are used by the object file format, and converts C++
1332 mangled symbol names into user readable names. Different compilers have
1333 different mangling styles. The optional demangling style argument can be used
1334 to choose an appropriate demangling style for your compiler. The linker will
1335 demangle by default unless the environment variable @samp{COLLECT_NO_DEMANGLE}
1336 is set. These options may be used to override the default.
1337
1338 @cindex dynamic linker, from command line
1339 @kindex -I@var{file}
1340 @kindex --dynamic-linker=@var{file}
1341 @item -I@var{file}
1342 @itemx --dynamic-linker=@var{file}
1343 Set the name of the dynamic linker. This is only meaningful when
1344 generating dynamically linked ELF executables. The default dynamic
1345 linker is normally correct; don't use this unless you know what you are
1346 doing.
1347
1348 @kindex --fatal-warnings
1349 @kindex --no-fatal-warnings
1350 @item --fatal-warnings
1351 @itemx --no-fatal-warnings
1352 Treat all warnings as errors. The default behaviour can be restored
1353 with the option @option{--no-fatal-warnings}.
1354
1355 @kindex --force-exe-suffix
1356 @item --force-exe-suffix
1357 Make sure that an output file has a .exe suffix.
1358
1359 If a successfully built fully linked output file does not have a
1360 @code{.exe} or @code{.dll} suffix, this option forces the linker to copy
1361 the output file to one of the same name with a @code{.exe} suffix. This
1362 option is useful when using unmodified Unix makefiles on a Microsoft
1363 Windows host, since some versions of Windows won't run an image unless
1364 it ends in a @code{.exe} suffix.
1365
1366 @kindex --gc-sections
1367 @kindex --no-gc-sections
1368 @cindex garbage collection
1369 @item --gc-sections
1370 @itemx --no-gc-sections
1371 Enable garbage collection of unused input sections. It is ignored on
1372 targets that do not support this option. The default behaviour (of not
1373 performing this garbage collection) can be restored by specifying
1374 @samp{--no-gc-sections} on the command line.
1375
1376 @samp{--gc-sections} decides which input sections are used by
1377 examining symbols and relocations. The section containing the entry
1378 symbol and all sections containing symbols undefined on the
1379 command-line will be kept, as will sections containing symbols
1380 referenced by dynamic objects. Note that when building shared
1381 libraries, the linker must assume that any visible symbol is
1382 referenced. Once this initial set of sections has been determined,
1383 the linker recursively marks as used any section referenced by their
1384 relocations. See @samp{--entry} and @samp{--undefined}.
1385
1386 This option can be set when doing a partial link (enabled with option
1387 @samp{-r}). In this case the root of symbols kept must be explicitly
1388 specified either by an @samp{--entry} or @samp{--undefined} option or by
1389 a @code{ENTRY} command in the linker script.
1390
1391 @kindex --print-gc-sections
1392 @kindex --no-print-gc-sections
1393 @cindex garbage collection
1394 @item --print-gc-sections
1395 @itemx --no-print-gc-sections
1396 List all sections removed by garbage collection. The listing is
1397 printed on stderr. This option is only effective if garbage
1398 collection has been enabled via the @samp{--gc-sections}) option. The
1399 default behaviour (of not listing the sections that are removed) can
1400 be restored by specifying @samp{--no-print-gc-sections} on the command
1401 line.
1402
1403 @cindex help
1404 @cindex usage
1405 @kindex --help
1406 @item --help
1407 Print a summary of the command-line options on the standard output and exit.
1408
1409 @kindex --target-help
1410 @item --target-help
1411 Print a summary of all target specific options on the standard output and exit.
1412
1413 @kindex -Map=@var{mapfile}
1414 @item -Map=@var{mapfile}
1415 Print a link map to the file @var{mapfile}. See the description of the
1416 @option{-M} option, above.
1417
1418 @cindex memory usage
1419 @kindex --no-keep-memory
1420 @item --no-keep-memory
1421 @command{ld} normally optimizes for speed over memory usage by caching the
1422 symbol tables of input files in memory. This option tells @command{ld} to
1423 instead optimize for memory usage, by rereading the symbol tables as
1424 necessary. This may be required if @command{ld} runs out of memory space
1425 while linking a large executable.
1426
1427 @kindex --no-undefined
1428 @kindex -z defs
1429 @item --no-undefined
1430 @itemx -z defs
1431 Report unresolved symbol references from regular object files. This
1432 is done even if the linker is creating a non-symbolic shared library.
1433 The switch @option{--[no-]allow-shlib-undefined} controls the
1434 behaviour for reporting unresolved references found in shared
1435 libraries being linked in.
1436
1437 @kindex --allow-multiple-definition
1438 @kindex -z muldefs
1439 @item --allow-multiple-definition
1440 @itemx -z muldefs
1441 Normally when a symbol is defined multiple times, the linker will
1442 report a fatal error. These options allow multiple definitions and the
1443 first definition will be used.
1444
1445 @kindex --allow-shlib-undefined
1446 @kindex --no-allow-shlib-undefined
1447 @item --allow-shlib-undefined
1448 @itemx --no-allow-shlib-undefined
1449 Allows or disallows undefined symbols in shared libraries.
1450 This switch is similar to @option{--no-undefined} except that it
1451 determines the behaviour when the undefined symbols are in a
1452 shared library rather than a regular object file. It does not affect
1453 how undefined symbols in regular object files are handled.
1454
1455 The default behaviour is to report errors for any undefined symbols
1456 referenced in shared libraries if the linker is being used to create
1457 an executable, but to allow them if the linker is being used to create
1458 a shared library.
1459
1460 The reasons for allowing undefined symbol references in shared
1461 libraries specified at link time are that:
1462
1463 @itemize @bullet
1464 @item
1465 A shared library specified at link time may not be the same as the one
1466 that is available at load time, so the symbol might actually be
1467 resolvable at load time.
1468 @item
1469 There are some operating systems, eg BeOS and HPPA, where undefined
1470 symbols in shared libraries are normal.
1471
1472 The BeOS kernel for example patches shared libraries at load time to
1473 select whichever function is most appropriate for the current
1474 architecture. This is used, for example, to dynamically select an
1475 appropriate memset function.
1476 @end itemize
1477
1478 @kindex --no-undefined-version
1479 @item --no-undefined-version
1480 Normally when a symbol has an undefined version, the linker will ignore
1481 it. This option disallows symbols with undefined version and a fatal error
1482 will be issued instead.
1483
1484 @kindex --default-symver
1485 @item --default-symver
1486 Create and use a default symbol version (the soname) for unversioned
1487 exported symbols.
1488
1489 @kindex --default-imported-symver
1490 @item --default-imported-symver
1491 Create and use a default symbol version (the soname) for unversioned
1492 imported symbols.
1493
1494 @kindex --no-warn-mismatch
1495 @item --no-warn-mismatch
1496 Normally @command{ld} will give an error if you try to link together input
1497 files that are mismatched for some reason, perhaps because they have
1498 been compiled for different processors or for different endiannesses.
1499 This option tells @command{ld} that it should silently permit such possible
1500 errors. This option should only be used with care, in cases when you
1501 have taken some special action that ensures that the linker errors are
1502 inappropriate.
1503
1504 @kindex --no-warn-search-mismatch
1505 @item --no-warn-search-mismatch
1506 Normally @command{ld} will give a warning if it finds an incompatible
1507 library during a library search. This option silences the warning.
1508
1509 @kindex --no-whole-archive
1510 @item --no-whole-archive
1511 Turn off the effect of the @option{--whole-archive} option for subsequent
1512 archive files.
1513
1514 @cindex output file after errors
1515 @kindex --noinhibit-exec
1516 @item --noinhibit-exec
1517 Retain the executable output file whenever it is still usable.
1518 Normally, the linker will not produce an output file if it encounters
1519 errors during the link process; it exits without writing an output file
1520 when it issues any error whatsoever.
1521
1522 @kindex -nostdlib
1523 @item -nostdlib
1524 Only search library directories explicitly specified on the
1525 command line. Library directories specified in linker scripts
1526 (including linker scripts specified on the command line) are ignored.
1527
1528 @ifclear SingleFormat
1529 @kindex --oformat=@var{output-format}
1530 @item --oformat=@var{output-format}
1531 @command{ld} may be configured to support more than one kind of object
1532 file. If your @command{ld} is configured this way, you can use the
1533 @samp{--oformat} option to specify the binary format for the output
1534 object file. Even when @command{ld} is configured to support alternative
1535 object formats, you don't usually need to specify this, as @command{ld}
1536 should be configured to produce as a default output format the most
1537 usual format on each machine. @var{output-format} is a text string, the
1538 name of a particular format supported by the BFD libraries. (You can
1539 list the available binary formats with @samp{objdump -i}.) The script
1540 command @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} can also specify the output format, but
1541 this option overrides it. @xref{BFD}.
1542 @end ifclear
1543
1544 @kindex -pie
1545 @kindex --pic-executable
1546 @item -pie
1547 @itemx --pic-executable
1548 @cindex position independent executables
1549 Create a position independent executable. This is currently only supported on
1550 ELF platforms. Position independent executables are similar to shared
1551 libraries in that they are relocated by the dynamic linker to the virtual
1552 address the OS chooses for them (which can vary between invocations). Like
1553 normal dynamically linked executables they can be executed and symbols
1554 defined in the executable cannot be overridden by shared libraries.
1555
1556 @kindex -qmagic
1557 @item -qmagic
1558 This option is ignored for Linux compatibility.
1559
1560 @kindex -Qy
1561 @item -Qy
1562 This option is ignored for SVR4 compatibility.
1563
1564 @kindex --relax
1565 @cindex synthesizing linker
1566 @cindex relaxing addressing modes
1567 @cindex --no-relax
1568 @item --relax
1569 @itemx --no-relax
1570 An option with machine dependent effects.
1571 @ifset GENERIC
1572 This option is only supported on a few targets.
1573 @end ifset
1574 @ifset H8300
1575 @xref{H8/300,,@command{ld} and the H8/300}.
1576 @end ifset
1577 @ifset I960
1578 @xref{i960,, @command{ld} and the Intel 960 family}.
1579 @end ifset
1580 @ifset XTENSA
1581 @xref{Xtensa,, @command{ld} and Xtensa Processors}.
1582 @end ifset
1583 @ifset M68HC11
1584 @xref{M68HC11/68HC12,,@command{ld} and the 68HC11 and 68HC12}.
1585 @end ifset
1586 @ifset POWERPC
1587 @xref{PowerPC ELF32,,@command{ld} and PowerPC 32-bit ELF Support}.
1588 @end ifset
1589
1590 On some platforms the @samp{--relax} option performs target specific,
1591 global optimizations that become possible when the linker resolves
1592 addressing in the program, such as relaxing address modes,
1593 synthesizing new instructions, selecting shorter version of current
1594 instructions, and combinig constant values.
1595
1596 On some platforms these link time global optimizations may make symbolic
1597 debugging of the resulting executable impossible.
1598 @ifset GENERIC
1599 This is known to be the case for the Matsushita MN10200 and MN10300
1600 family of processors.
1601 @end ifset
1602
1603 @ifset GENERIC
1604 On platforms where this is not supported, @samp{--relax} is accepted,
1605 but ignored.
1606 @end ifset
1607
1608 On platforms where @samp{--relax} is accepted the option
1609 @samp{--no-relax} can be used to disable the feature.
1610
1611 @cindex retaining specified symbols
1612 @cindex stripping all but some symbols
1613 @cindex symbols, retaining selectively
1614 @kindex --retain-symbols-file=@var{filename}
1615 @item --retain-symbols-file=@var{filename}
1616 Retain @emph{only} the symbols listed in the file @var{filename},
1617 discarding all others. @var{filename} is simply a flat file, with one
1618 symbol name per line. This option is especially useful in environments
1619 @ifset GENERIC
1620 (such as VxWorks)
1621 @end ifset
1622 where a large global symbol table is accumulated gradually, to conserve
1623 run-time memory.
1624
1625 @samp{--retain-symbols-file} does @emph{not} discard undefined symbols,
1626 or symbols needed for relocations.
1627
1628 You may only specify @samp{--retain-symbols-file} once in the command
1629 line. It overrides @samp{-s} and @samp{-S}.
1630
1631 @ifset GENERIC
1632 @item -rpath=@var{dir}
1633 @cindex runtime library search path
1634 @kindex -rpath=@var{dir}
1635 Add a directory to the runtime library search path. This is used when
1636 linking an ELF executable with shared objects. All @option{-rpath}
1637 arguments are concatenated and passed to the runtime linker, which uses
1638 them to locate shared objects at runtime. The @option{-rpath} option is
1639 also used when locating shared objects which are needed by shared
1640 objects explicitly included in the link; see the description of the
1641 @option{-rpath-link} option. If @option{-rpath} is not used when linking an
1642 ELF executable, the contents of the environment variable
1643 @code{LD_RUN_PATH} will be used if it is defined.
1644
1645 The @option{-rpath} option may also be used on SunOS. By default, on
1646 SunOS, the linker will form a runtime search patch out of all the
1647 @option{-L} options it is given. If a @option{-rpath} option is used, the
1648 runtime search path will be formed exclusively using the @option{-rpath}
1649 options, ignoring the @option{-L} options. This can be useful when using
1650 gcc, which adds many @option{-L} options which may be on NFS mounted
1651 file systems.
1652
1653 For compatibility with other ELF linkers, if the @option{-R} option is
1654 followed by a directory name, rather than a file name, it is treated as
1655 the @option{-rpath} option.
1656 @end ifset
1657
1658 @ifset GENERIC
1659 @cindex link-time runtime library search path
1660 @kindex -rpath-link=@var{dir}
1661 @item -rpath-link=@var{dir}
1662 When using ELF or SunOS, one shared library may require another. This
1663 happens when an @code{ld -shared} link includes a shared library as one
1664 of the input files.
1665
1666 When the linker encounters such a dependency when doing a non-shared,
1667 non-relocatable link, it will automatically try to locate the required
1668 shared library and include it in the link, if it is not included
1669 explicitly. In such a case, the @option{-rpath-link} option
1670 specifies the first set of directories to search. The
1671 @option{-rpath-link} option may specify a sequence of directory names
1672 either by specifying a list of names separated by colons, or by
1673 appearing multiple times.
1674
1675 This option should be used with caution as it overrides the search path
1676 that may have been hard compiled into a shared library. In such a case it
1677 is possible to use unintentionally a different search path than the
1678 runtime linker would do.
1679
1680 The linker uses the following search paths to locate required shared
1681 libraries:
1682 @enumerate
1683 @item
1684 Any directories specified by @option{-rpath-link} options.
1685 @item
1686 Any directories specified by @option{-rpath} options. The difference
1687 between @option{-rpath} and @option{-rpath-link} is that directories
1688 specified by @option{-rpath} options are included in the executable and
1689 used at runtime, whereas the @option{-rpath-link} option is only effective
1690 at link time. Searching @option{-rpath} in this way is only supported
1691 by native linkers and cross linkers which have been configured with
1692 the @option{--with-sysroot} option.
1693 @item
1694 On an ELF system, for native linkers, if the @option{-rpath} and
1695 @option{-rpath-link} options were not used, search the contents of the
1696 environment variable @code{LD_RUN_PATH}.
1697 @item
1698 On SunOS, if the @option{-rpath} option was not used, search any
1699 directories specified using @option{-L} options.
1700 @item
1701 For a native linker, the search the contents of the environment
1702 variable @code{LD_LIBRARY_PATH}.
1703 @item
1704 For a native ELF linker, the directories in @code{DT_RUNPATH} or
1705 @code{DT_RPATH} of a shared library are searched for shared
1706 libraries needed by it. The @code{DT_RPATH} entries are ignored if
1707 @code{DT_RUNPATH} entries exist.
1708 @item
1709 The default directories, normally @file{/lib} and @file{/usr/lib}.
1710 @item
1711 For a native linker on an ELF system, if the file @file{/etc/ld.so.conf}
1712 exists, the list of directories found in that file.
1713 @end enumerate
1714
1715 If the required shared library is not found, the linker will issue a
1716 warning and continue with the link.
1717 @end ifset
1718
1719 @kindex -shared
1720 @kindex -Bshareable
1721 @item -shared
1722 @itemx -Bshareable
1723 @cindex shared libraries
1724 Create a shared library. This is currently only supported on ELF, XCOFF
1725 and SunOS platforms. On SunOS, the linker will automatically create a
1726 shared library if the @option{-e} option is not used and there are
1727 undefined symbols in the link.
1728
1729 @kindex --sort-common
1730 @item --sort-common
1731 @itemx --sort-common=ascending
1732 @itemx --sort-common=descending
1733 This option tells @command{ld} to sort the common symbols by alignment in
1734 ascending or descending order when it places them in the appropriate output
1735 sections. The symbol alignments considered are sixteen-byte or larger,
1736 eight-byte, four-byte, two-byte, and one-byte. This is to prevent gaps
1737 between symbols due to alignment constraints. If no sorting order is
1738 specified, then descending order is assumed.
1739
1740 @kindex --sort-section=name
1741 @item --sort-section=name
1742 This option will apply @code{SORT_BY_NAME} to all wildcard section
1743 patterns in the linker script.
1744
1745 @kindex --sort-section=alignment
1746 @item --sort-section=alignment
1747 This option will apply @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} to all wildcard section
1748 patterns in the linker script.
1749
1750 @kindex --split-by-file
1751 @item --split-by-file[=@var{size}]
1752 Similar to @option{--split-by-reloc} but creates a new output section for
1753 each input file when @var{size} is reached. @var{size} defaults to a
1754 size of 1 if not given.
1755
1756 @kindex --split-by-reloc
1757 @item --split-by-reloc[=@var{count}]
1758 Tries to creates extra sections in the output file so that no single
1759 output section in the file contains more than @var{count} relocations.
1760 This is useful when generating huge relocatable files for downloading into
1761 certain real time kernels with the COFF object file format; since COFF
1762 cannot represent more than 65535 relocations in a single section. Note
1763 that this will fail to work with object file formats which do not
1764 support arbitrary sections. The linker will not split up individual
1765 input sections for redistribution, so if a single input section contains
1766 more than @var{count} relocations one output section will contain that
1767 many relocations. @var{count} defaults to a value of 32768.
1768
1769 @kindex --stats
1770 @item --stats
1771 Compute and display statistics about the operation of the linker, such
1772 as execution time and memory usage.
1773
1774 @kindex --sysroot=@var{directory}
1775 @item --sysroot=@var{directory}
1776 Use @var{directory} as the location of the sysroot, overriding the
1777 configure-time default. This option is only supported by linkers
1778 that were configured using @option{--with-sysroot}.
1779
1780 @kindex --traditional-format
1781 @cindex traditional format
1782 @item --traditional-format
1783 For some targets, the output of @command{ld} is different in some ways from
1784 the output of some existing linker. This switch requests @command{ld} to
1785 use the traditional format instead.
1786
1787 @cindex dbx
1788 For example, on SunOS, @command{ld} combines duplicate entries in the
1789 symbol string table. This can reduce the size of an output file with
1790 full debugging information by over 30 percent. Unfortunately, the SunOS
1791 @code{dbx} program can not read the resulting program (@code{gdb} has no
1792 trouble). The @samp{--traditional-format} switch tells @command{ld} to not
1793 combine duplicate entries.
1794
1795 @kindex --section-start=@var{sectionname}=@var{org}
1796 @item --section-start=@var{sectionname}=@var{org}
1797 Locate a section in the output file at the absolute
1798 address given by @var{org}. You may use this option as many
1799 times as necessary to locate multiple sections in the command
1800 line.
1801 @var{org} must be a single hexadecimal integer;
1802 for compatibility with other linkers, you may omit the leading
1803 @samp{0x} usually associated with hexadecimal values. @emph{Note:} there
1804 should be no white space between @var{sectionname}, the equals
1805 sign (``@key{=}''), and @var{org}.
1806
1807 @kindex -Tbss=@var{org}
1808 @kindex -Tdata=@var{org}
1809 @kindex -Ttext=@var{org}
1810 @cindex segment origins, cmd line
1811 @item -Tbss=@var{org}
1812 @itemx -Tdata=@var{org}
1813 @itemx -Ttext=@var{org}
1814 Same as @option{--section-start}, with @code{.bss}, @code{.data} or
1815 @code{.text} as the @var{sectionname}.
1816
1817 @kindex -Ttext-segment=@var{org}
1818 @item -Ttext-segment=@var{org}
1819 @cindex text segment origin, cmd line
1820 When creating an ELF executable or shared object, it will set the address
1821 of the first byte of the text segment.
1822
1823 @kindex --unresolved-symbols
1824 @item --unresolved-symbols=@var{method}
1825 Determine how to handle unresolved symbols. There are four possible
1826 values for @samp{method}:
1827
1828 @table @samp
1829 @item ignore-all
1830 Do not report any unresolved symbols.
1831
1832 @item report-all
1833 Report all unresolved symbols. This is the default.
1834
1835 @item ignore-in-object-files
1836 Report unresolved symbols that are contained in shared libraries, but
1837 ignore them if they come from regular object files.
1838
1839 @item ignore-in-shared-libs
1840 Report unresolved symbols that come from regular object files, but
1841 ignore them if they come from shared libraries. This can be useful
1842 when creating a dynamic binary and it is known that all the shared
1843 libraries that it should be referencing are included on the linker's
1844 command line.
1845 @end table
1846
1847 The behaviour for shared libraries on their own can also be controlled
1848 by the @option{--[no-]allow-shlib-undefined} option.
1849
1850 Normally the linker will generate an error message for each reported
1851 unresolved symbol but the option @option{--warn-unresolved-symbols}
1852 can change this to a warning.
1853
1854 @kindex --verbose
1855 @cindex verbose
1856 @item --dll-verbose
1857 @itemx --verbose
1858 Display the version number for @command{ld} and list the linker emulations
1859 supported. Display which input files can and cannot be opened. Display
1860 the linker script being used by the linker.
1861
1862 @kindex --version-script=@var{version-scriptfile}
1863 @cindex version script, symbol versions
1864 @item --version-script=@var{version-scriptfile}
1865 Specify the name of a version script to the linker. This is typically
1866 used when creating shared libraries to specify additional information
1867 about the version hierarchy for the library being created. This option
1868 is only fully supported on ELF platforms which support shared libraries;
1869 see @ref{VERSION}. It is partially supported on PE platforms, which can
1870 use version scripts to filter symbol visibility in auto-export mode: any
1871 symbols marked @samp{local} in the version script will not be exported.
1872 @xref{WIN32}.
1873
1874 @kindex --warn-common
1875 @cindex warnings, on combining symbols
1876 @cindex combining symbols, warnings on
1877 @item --warn-common
1878 Warn when a common symbol is combined with another common symbol or with
1879 a symbol definition. Unix linkers allow this somewhat sloppy practise,
1880 but linkers on some other operating systems do not. This option allows
1881 you to find potential problems from combining global symbols.
1882 Unfortunately, some C libraries use this practise, so you may get some
1883 warnings about symbols in the libraries as well as in your programs.
1884
1885 There are three kinds of global symbols, illustrated here by C examples:
1886
1887 @table @samp
1888 @item int i = 1;
1889 A definition, which goes in the initialized data section of the output
1890 file.
1891
1892 @item extern int i;
1893 An undefined reference, which does not allocate space.
1894 There must be either a definition or a common symbol for the
1895 variable somewhere.
1896
1897 @item int i;
1898 A common symbol. If there are only (one or more) common symbols for a
1899 variable, it goes in the uninitialized data area of the output file.
1900 The linker merges multiple common symbols for the same variable into a
1901 single symbol. If they are of different sizes, it picks the largest
1902 size. The linker turns a common symbol into a declaration, if there is
1903 a definition of the same variable.
1904 @end table
1905
1906 The @samp{--warn-common} option can produce five kinds of warnings.
1907 Each warning consists of a pair of lines: the first describes the symbol
1908 just encountered, and the second describes the previous symbol
1909 encountered with the same name. One or both of the two symbols will be
1910 a common symbol.
1911
1912 @enumerate
1913 @item
1914 Turning a common symbol into a reference, because there is already a
1915 definition for the symbol.
1916 @smallexample
1917 @var{file}(@var{section}): warning: common of `@var{symbol}'
1918 overridden by definition
1919 @var{file}(@var{section}): warning: defined here
1920 @end smallexample
1921
1922 @item
1923 Turning a common symbol into a reference, because a later definition for
1924 the symbol is encountered. This is the same as the previous case,
1925 except that the symbols are encountered in a different order.
1926 @smallexample
1927 @var{file}(@var{section}): warning: definition of `@var{symbol}'
1928 overriding common
1929 @var{file}(@var{section}): warning: common is here
1930 @end smallexample
1931
1932 @item
1933 Merging a common symbol with a previous same-sized common symbol.
1934 @smallexample
1935 @var{file}(@var{section}): warning: multiple common
1936 of `@var{symbol}'
1937 @var{file}(@var{section}): warning: previous common is here
1938 @end smallexample
1939
1940 @item
1941 Merging a common symbol with a previous larger common symbol.
1942 @smallexample
1943 @var{file}(@var{section}): warning: common of `@var{symbol}'
1944 overridden by larger common
1945 @var{file}(@var{section}): warning: larger common is here
1946 @end smallexample
1947
1948 @item
1949 Merging a common symbol with a previous smaller common symbol. This is
1950 the same as the previous case, except that the symbols are
1951 encountered in a different order.
1952 @smallexample
1953 @var{file}(@var{section}): warning: common of `@var{symbol}'
1954 overriding smaller common
1955 @var{file}(@var{section}): warning: smaller common is here
1956 @end smallexample
1957 @end enumerate
1958
1959 @kindex --warn-constructors
1960 @item --warn-constructors
1961 Warn if any global constructors are used. This is only useful for a few
1962 object file formats. For formats like COFF or ELF, the linker can not
1963 detect the use of global constructors.
1964
1965 @kindex --warn-multiple-gp
1966 @item --warn-multiple-gp
1967 Warn if multiple global pointer values are required in the output file.
1968 This is only meaningful for certain processors, such as the Alpha.
1969 Specifically, some processors put large-valued constants in a special
1970 section. A special register (the global pointer) points into the middle
1971 of this section, so that constants can be loaded efficiently via a
1972 base-register relative addressing mode. Since the offset in
1973 base-register relative mode is fixed and relatively small (e.g., 16
1974 bits), this limits the maximum size of the constant pool. Thus, in
1975 large programs, it is often necessary to use multiple global pointer
1976 values in order to be able to address all possible constants. This
1977 option causes a warning to be issued whenever this case occurs.
1978
1979 @kindex --warn-once
1980 @cindex warnings, on undefined symbols
1981 @cindex undefined symbols, warnings on
1982 @item --warn-once
1983 Only warn once for each undefined symbol, rather than once per module
1984 which refers to it.
1985
1986 @kindex --warn-section-align
1987 @cindex warnings, on section alignment
1988 @cindex section alignment, warnings on
1989 @item --warn-section-align
1990 Warn if the address of an output section is changed because of
1991 alignment. Typically, the alignment will be set by an input section.
1992 The address will only be changed if it not explicitly specified; that
1993 is, if the @code{SECTIONS} command does not specify a start address for
1994 the section (@pxref{SECTIONS}).
1995
1996 @kindex --warn-shared-textrel
1997 @item --warn-shared-textrel
1998 Warn if the linker adds a DT_TEXTREL to a shared object.
1999
2000 @kindex --warn-alternate-em
2001 @item --warn-alternate-em
2002 Warn if an object has alternate ELF machine code.
2003
2004 @kindex --warn-unresolved-symbols
2005 @item --warn-unresolved-symbols
2006 If the linker is going to report an unresolved symbol (see the option
2007 @option{--unresolved-symbols}) it will normally generate an error.
2008 This option makes it generate a warning instead.
2009
2010 @kindex --error-unresolved-symbols
2011 @item --error-unresolved-symbols
2012 This restores the linker's default behaviour of generating errors when
2013 it is reporting unresolved symbols.
2014
2015 @kindex --whole-archive
2016 @cindex including an entire archive
2017 @item --whole-archive
2018 For each archive mentioned on the command line after the
2019 @option{--whole-archive} option, include every object file in the archive
2020 in the link, rather than searching the archive for the required object
2021 files. This is normally used to turn an archive file into a shared
2022 library, forcing every object to be included in the resulting shared
2023 library. This option may be used more than once.
2024
2025 Two notes when using this option from gcc: First, gcc doesn't know
2026 about this option, so you have to use @option{-Wl,-whole-archive}.
2027 Second, don't forget to use @option{-Wl,-no-whole-archive} after your
2028 list of archives, because gcc will add its own list of archives to
2029 your link and you may not want this flag to affect those as well.
2030
2031 @kindex --wrap=@var{symbol}
2032 @item --wrap=@var{symbol}
2033 Use a wrapper function for @var{symbol}. Any undefined reference to
2034 @var{symbol} will be resolved to @code{__wrap_@var{symbol}}. Any
2035 undefined reference to @code{__real_@var{symbol}} will be resolved to
2036 @var{symbol}.
2037
2038 This can be used to provide a wrapper for a system function. The
2039 wrapper function should be called @code{__wrap_@var{symbol}}. If it
2040 wishes to call the system function, it should call
2041 @code{__real_@var{symbol}}.
2042
2043 Here is a trivial example:
2044
2045 @smallexample
2046 void *
2047 __wrap_malloc (size_t c)
2048 @{
2049 printf ("malloc called with %zu\n", c);
2050 return __real_malloc (c);
2051 @}
2052 @end smallexample
2053
2054 If you link other code with this file using @option{--wrap malloc}, then
2055 all calls to @code{malloc} will call the function @code{__wrap_malloc}
2056 instead. The call to @code{__real_malloc} in @code{__wrap_malloc} will
2057 call the real @code{malloc} function.
2058
2059 You may wish to provide a @code{__real_malloc} function as well, so that
2060 links without the @option{--wrap} option will succeed. If you do this,
2061 you should not put the definition of @code{__real_malloc} in the same
2062 file as @code{__wrap_malloc}; if you do, the assembler may resolve the
2063 call before the linker has a chance to wrap it to @code{malloc}.
2064
2065 @kindex --eh-frame-hdr
2066 @item --eh-frame-hdr
2067 Request creation of @code{.eh_frame_hdr} section and ELF
2068 @code{PT_GNU_EH_FRAME} segment header.
2069
2070 @kindex --enable-new-dtags
2071 @kindex --disable-new-dtags
2072 @item --enable-new-dtags
2073 @itemx --disable-new-dtags
2074 This linker can create the new dynamic tags in ELF. But the older ELF
2075 systems may not understand them. If you specify
2076 @option{--enable-new-dtags}, the dynamic tags will be created as needed.
2077 If you specify @option{--disable-new-dtags}, no new dynamic tags will be
2078 created. By default, the new dynamic tags are not created. Note that
2079 those options are only available for ELF systems.
2080
2081 @kindex --hash-size=@var{number}
2082 @item --hash-size=@var{number}
2083 Set the default size of the linker's hash tables to a prime number
2084 close to @var{number}. Increasing this value can reduce the length of
2085 time it takes the linker to perform its tasks, at the expense of
2086 increasing the linker's memory requirements. Similarly reducing this
2087 value can reduce the memory requirements at the expense of speed.
2088
2089 @kindex --hash-style=@var{style}
2090 @item --hash-style=@var{style}
2091 Set the type of linker's hash table(s). @var{style} can be either
2092 @code{sysv} for classic ELF @code{.hash} section, @code{gnu} for
2093 new style GNU @code{.gnu.hash} section or @code{both} for both
2094 the classic ELF @code{.hash} and new style GNU @code{.gnu.hash}
2095 hash tables. The default is @code{sysv}.
2096
2097 @kindex --reduce-memory-overheads
2098 @item --reduce-memory-overheads
2099 This option reduces memory requirements at ld runtime, at the expense of
2100 linking speed. This was introduced to select the old O(n^2) algorithm
2101 for link map file generation, rather than the new O(n) algorithm which uses
2102 about 40% more memory for symbol storage.
2103
2104 Another effect of the switch is to set the default hash table size to
2105 1021, which again saves memory at the cost of lengthening the linker's
2106 run time. This is not done however if the @option{--hash-size} switch
2107 has been used.
2108
2109 The @option{--reduce-memory-overheads} switch may be also be used to
2110 enable other tradeoffs in future versions of the linker.
2111
2112 @kindex --build-id
2113 @kindex --build-id=@var{style}
2114 @item --build-id
2115 @itemx --build-id=@var{style}
2116 Request creation of @code{.note.gnu.build-id} ELF note section.
2117 The contents of the note are unique bits identifying this linked
2118 file. @var{style} can be @code{uuid} to use 128 random bits,
2119 @code{sha1} to use a 160-bit @sc{SHA1} hash on the normative
2120 parts of the output contents, @code{md5} to use a 128-bit
2121 @sc{MD5} hash on the normative parts of the output contents, or
2122 @code{0x@var{hexstring}} to use a chosen bit string specified as
2123 an even number of hexadecimal digits (@code{-} and @code{:}
2124 characters between digit pairs are ignored). If @var{style} is
2125 omitted, @code{sha1} is used.
2126
2127 The @code{md5} and @code{sha1} styles produces an identifier
2128 that is always the same in an identical output file, but will be
2129 unique among all nonidentical output files. It is not intended
2130 to be compared as a checksum for the file's contents. A linked
2131 file may be changed later by other tools, but the build ID bit
2132 string identifying the original linked file does not change.
2133
2134 Passing @code{none} for @var{style} disables the setting from any
2135 @code{--build-id} options earlier on the command line.
2136 @end table
2137
2138 @c man end
2139
2140 @subsection Options Specific to i386 PE Targets
2141
2142 @c man begin OPTIONS
2143
2144 The i386 PE linker supports the @option{-shared} option, which causes
2145 the output to be a dynamically linked library (DLL) instead of a
2146 normal executable. You should name the output @code{*.dll} when you
2147 use this option. In addition, the linker fully supports the standard
2148 @code{*.def} files, which may be specified on the linker command line
2149 like an object file (in fact, it should precede archives it exports
2150 symbols from, to ensure that they get linked in, just like a normal
2151 object file).
2152
2153 In addition to the options common to all targets, the i386 PE linker
2154 support additional command line options that are specific to the i386
2155 PE target. Options that take values may be separated from their
2156 values by either a space or an equals sign.
2157
2158 @table @gcctabopt
2159
2160 @kindex --add-stdcall-alias
2161 @item --add-stdcall-alias
2162 If given, symbols with a stdcall suffix (@@@var{nn}) will be exported
2163 as-is and also with the suffix stripped.
2164 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2165
2166 @kindex --base-file
2167 @item --base-file @var{file}
2168 Use @var{file} as the name of a file in which to save the base
2169 addresses of all the relocations needed for generating DLLs with
2170 @file{dlltool}.
2171 [This is an i386 PE specific option]
2172
2173 @kindex --dll
2174 @item --dll
2175 Create a DLL instead of a regular executable. You may also use
2176 @option{-shared} or specify a @code{LIBRARY} in a given @code{.def}
2177 file.
2178 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2179
2180 @kindex --enable-long-section-names
2181 @kindex --disable-long-section-names
2182 @item --enable-long-section-names
2183 @itemx --disable-long-section-names
2184 The PE variants of the Coff object format add an extension that permits
2185 the use of section names longer than eight characters, the normal limit
2186 for Coff. By default, these names are only allowed in object files, as
2187 fully-linked executable images do not carry the Coff string table required
2188 to support the longer names. As a GNU extension, it is possible to
2189 allow their use in executable images as well, or to (probably pointlessly!)
2190 disallow it in object files, by using these two options. Executable images
2191 generated with these long section names are slightly non-standard, carrying
2192 as they do a string table, and may generate confusing output when examined
2193 with non-GNU PE-aware tools, such as file viewers and dumpers. However,
2194 GDB relies on the use of PE long section names to find Dwarf-2 debug
2195 information sections in an executable image at runtime, and so if neither
2196 option is specified on the command-line, @command{ld} will enable long
2197 section names, overriding the default and technically correct behaviour,
2198 when it finds the presence of debug information while linking an executable
2199 image and not stripping symbols.
2200 [This option is valid for all PE targeted ports of the linker]
2201
2202 @kindex --enable-stdcall-fixup
2203 @kindex --disable-stdcall-fixup
2204 @item --enable-stdcall-fixup
2205 @itemx --disable-stdcall-fixup
2206 If the link finds a symbol that it cannot resolve, it will attempt to
2207 do ``fuzzy linking'' by looking for another defined symbol that differs
2208 only in the format of the symbol name (cdecl vs stdcall) and will
2209 resolve that symbol by linking to the match. For example, the
2210 undefined symbol @code{_foo} might be linked to the function
2211 @code{_foo@@12}, or the undefined symbol @code{_bar@@16} might be linked
2212 to the function @code{_bar}. When the linker does this, it prints a
2213 warning, since it normally should have failed to link, but sometimes
2214 import libraries generated from third-party dlls may need this feature
2215 to be usable. If you specify @option{--enable-stdcall-fixup}, this
2216 feature is fully enabled and warnings are not printed. If you specify
2217 @option{--disable-stdcall-fixup}, this feature is disabled and such
2218 mismatches are considered to be errors.
2219 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2220
2221 @kindex --leading-underscore
2222 @kindex --no-leading-underscore
2223 @item --leading-underscore
2224 @itemx --no-leading-underscore
2225 For most targets default symbol-prefix is an underscore and is defined
2226 in target's description. By this option it is possible to
2227 disable/enable the default underscore symbol-prefix.
2228
2229 @cindex DLLs, creating
2230 @kindex --export-all-symbols
2231 @item --export-all-symbols
2232 If given, all global symbols in the objects used to build a DLL will
2233 be exported by the DLL. Note that this is the default if there
2234 otherwise wouldn't be any exported symbols. When symbols are
2235 explicitly exported via DEF files or implicitly exported via function
2236 attributes, the default is to not export anything else unless this
2237 option is given. Note that the symbols @code{DllMain@@12},
2238 @code{DllEntryPoint@@0}, @code{DllMainCRTStartup@@12}, and
2239 @code{impure_ptr} will not be automatically
2240 exported. Also, symbols imported from other DLLs will not be
2241 re-exported, nor will symbols specifying the DLL's internal layout
2242 such as those beginning with @code{_head_} or ending with
2243 @code{_iname}. In addition, no symbols from @code{libgcc},
2244 @code{libstd++}, @code{libmingw32}, or @code{crtX.o} will be exported.
2245 Symbols whose names begin with @code{__rtti_} or @code{__builtin_} will
2246 not be exported, to help with C++ DLLs. Finally, there is an
2247 extensive list of cygwin-private symbols that are not exported
2248 (obviously, this applies on when building DLLs for cygwin targets).
2249 These cygwin-excludes are: @code{_cygwin_dll_entry@@12},
2250 @code{_cygwin_crt0_common@@8}, @code{_cygwin_noncygwin_dll_entry@@12},
2251 @code{_fmode}, @code{_impure_ptr}, @code{cygwin_attach_dll},
2252 @code{cygwin_premain0}, @code{cygwin_premain1}, @code{cygwin_premain2},
2253 @code{cygwin_premain3}, and @code{environ}.
2254 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2255
2256 @kindex --exclude-symbols
2257 @item --exclude-symbols @var{symbol},@var{symbol},...
2258 Specifies a list of symbols which should not be automatically
2259 exported. The symbol names may be delimited by commas or colons.
2260 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2261
2262 @kindex --exclude-all-symbols
2263 @item --exclude-all-symbols
2264 Specifies no symbols should be automatically exported.
2265 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2266
2267 @kindex --file-alignment
2268 @item --file-alignment
2269 Specify the file alignment. Sections in the file will always begin at
2270 file offsets which are multiples of this number. This defaults to
2271 512.
2272 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2273
2274 @cindex heap size
2275 @kindex --heap
2276 @item --heap @var{reserve}
2277 @itemx --heap @var{reserve},@var{commit}
2278 Specify the number of bytes of memory to reserve (and optionally commit)
2279 to be used as heap for this program. The default is 1Mb reserved, 4K
2280 committed.
2281 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2282
2283 @cindex image base
2284 @kindex --image-base
2285 @item --image-base @var{value}
2286 Use @var{value} as the base address of your program or dll. This is
2287 the lowest memory location that will be used when your program or dll
2288 is loaded. To reduce the need to relocate and improve performance of
2289 your dlls, each should have a unique base address and not overlap any
2290 other dlls. The default is 0x400000 for executables, and 0x10000000
2291 for dlls.
2292 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2293
2294 @kindex --kill-at
2295 @item --kill-at
2296 If given, the stdcall suffixes (@@@var{nn}) will be stripped from
2297 symbols before they are exported.
2298 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2299
2300 @kindex --large-address-aware
2301 @item --large-address-aware
2302 If given, the appropriate bit in the ``Characteristics'' field of the COFF
2303 header is set to indicate that this executable supports virtual addresses
2304 greater than 2 gigabytes. This should be used in conjunction with the /3GB
2305 or /USERVA=@var{value} megabytes switch in the ``[operating systems]''
2306 section of the BOOT.INI. Otherwise, this bit has no effect.
2307 [This option is specific to PE targeted ports of the linker]
2308
2309 @kindex --major-image-version
2310 @item --major-image-version @var{value}
2311 Sets the major number of the ``image version''. Defaults to 1.
2312 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2313
2314 @kindex --major-os-version
2315 @item --major-os-version @var{value}
2316 Sets the major number of the ``os version''. Defaults to 4.
2317 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2318
2319 @kindex --major-subsystem-version
2320 @item --major-subsystem-version @var{value}
2321 Sets the major number of the ``subsystem version''. Defaults to 4.
2322 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2323
2324 @kindex --minor-image-version
2325 @item --minor-image-version @var{value}
2326 Sets the minor number of the ``image version''. Defaults to 0.
2327 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2328
2329 @kindex --minor-os-version
2330 @item --minor-os-version @var{value}
2331 Sets the minor number of the ``os version''. Defaults to 0.
2332 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2333
2334 @kindex --minor-subsystem-version
2335 @item --minor-subsystem-version @var{value}
2336 Sets the minor number of the ``subsystem version''. Defaults to 0.
2337 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2338
2339 @cindex DEF files, creating
2340 @cindex DLLs, creating
2341 @kindex --output-def
2342 @item --output-def @var{file}
2343 The linker will create the file @var{file} which will contain a DEF
2344 file corresponding to the DLL the linker is generating. This DEF file
2345 (which should be called @code{*.def}) may be used to create an import
2346 library with @code{dlltool} or may be used as a reference to
2347 automatically or implicitly exported symbols.
2348 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2349
2350 @cindex DLLs, creating
2351 @kindex --out-implib
2352 @item --out-implib @var{file}
2353 The linker will create the file @var{file} which will contain an
2354 import lib corresponding to the DLL the linker is generating. This
2355 import lib (which should be called @code{*.dll.a} or @code{*.a}
2356 may be used to link clients against the generated DLL; this behaviour
2357 makes it possible to skip a separate @code{dlltool} import library
2358 creation step.
2359 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2360
2361 @kindex --enable-auto-image-base
2362 @item --enable-auto-image-base
2363 Automatically choose the image base for DLLs, unless one is specified
2364 using the @code{--image-base} argument. By using a hash generated
2365 from the dllname to create unique image bases for each DLL, in-memory
2366 collisions and relocations which can delay program execution are
2367 avoided.
2368 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2369
2370 @kindex --disable-auto-image-base
2371 @item --disable-auto-image-base
2372 Do not automatically generate a unique image base. If there is no
2373 user-specified image base (@code{--image-base}) then use the platform
2374 default.
2375 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2376
2377 @cindex DLLs, linking to
2378 @kindex --dll-search-prefix
2379 @item --dll-search-prefix @var{string}
2380 When linking dynamically to a dll without an import library,
2381 search for @code{<string><basename>.dll} in preference to
2382 @code{lib<basename>.dll}. This behaviour allows easy distinction
2383 between DLLs built for the various "subplatforms": native, cygwin,
2384 uwin, pw, etc. For instance, cygwin DLLs typically use
2385 @code{--dll-search-prefix=cyg}.
2386 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2387
2388 @kindex --enable-auto-import
2389 @item --enable-auto-import
2390 Do sophisticated linking of @code{_symbol} to @code{__imp__symbol} for
2391 DATA imports from DLLs, and create the necessary thunking symbols when
2392 building the import libraries with those DATA exports. Note: Use of the
2393 'auto-import' extension will cause the text section of the image file
2394 to be made writable. This does not conform to the PE-COFF format
2395 specification published by Microsoft.
2396
2397 Note - use of the 'auto-import' extension will also cause read only
2398 data which would normally be placed into the .rdata section to be
2399 placed into the .data section instead. This is in order to work
2400 around a problem with consts that is described here:
2401 http://www.cygwin.com/ml/cygwin/2004-09/msg01101.html
2402
2403 Using 'auto-import' generally will 'just work' -- but sometimes you may
2404 see this message:
2405
2406 "variable '<var>' can't be auto-imported. Please read the
2407 documentation for ld's @code{--enable-auto-import} for details."
2408
2409 This message occurs when some (sub)expression accesses an address
2410 ultimately given by the sum of two constants (Win32 import tables only
2411 allow one). Instances where this may occur include accesses to member
2412 fields of struct variables imported from a DLL, as well as using a
2413 constant index into an array variable imported from a DLL. Any
2414 multiword variable (arrays, structs, long long, etc) may trigger
2415 this error condition. However, regardless of the exact data type
2416 of the offending exported variable, ld will always detect it, issue
2417 the warning, and exit.
2418
2419 There are several ways to address this difficulty, regardless of the
2420 data type of the exported variable:
2421
2422 One way is to use --enable-runtime-pseudo-reloc switch. This leaves the task
2423 of adjusting references in your client code for runtime environment, so
2424 this method works only when runtime environment supports this feature.
2425
2426 A second solution is to force one of the 'constants' to be a variable --
2427 that is, unknown and un-optimizable at compile time. For arrays,
2428 there are two possibilities: a) make the indexee (the array's address)
2429 a variable, or b) make the 'constant' index a variable. Thus:
2430
2431 @example
2432 extern type extern_array[];
2433 extern_array[1] -->
2434 @{ volatile type *t=extern_array; t[1] @}
2435 @end example
2436
2437 or
2438
2439 @example
2440 extern type extern_array[];
2441 extern_array[1] -->
2442 @{ volatile int t=1; extern_array[t] @}
2443 @end example
2444
2445 For structs (and most other multiword data types) the only option
2446 is to make the struct itself (or the long long, or the ...) variable:
2447
2448 @example
2449 extern struct s extern_struct;
2450 extern_struct.field -->
2451 @{ volatile struct s *t=&extern_struct; t->field @}
2452 @end example
2453
2454 or
2455
2456 @example
2457 extern long long extern_ll;
2458 extern_ll -->
2459 @{ volatile long long * local_ll=&extern_ll; *local_ll @}
2460 @end example
2461
2462 A third method of dealing with this difficulty is to abandon
2463 'auto-import' for the offending symbol and mark it with
2464 @code{__declspec(dllimport)}. However, in practise that
2465 requires using compile-time #defines to indicate whether you are
2466 building a DLL, building client code that will link to the DLL, or
2467 merely building/linking to a static library. In making the choice
2468 between the various methods of resolving the 'direct address with
2469 constant offset' problem, you should consider typical real-world usage:
2470
2471 Original:
2472 @example
2473 --foo.h
2474 extern int arr[];
2475 --foo.c
2476 #include "foo.h"
2477 void main(int argc, char **argv)@{
2478 printf("%d\n",arr[1]);
2479 @}
2480 @end example
2481
2482 Solution 1:
2483 @example
2484 --foo.h
2485 extern int arr[];
2486 --foo.c
2487 #include "foo.h"
2488 void main(int argc, char **argv)@{
2489 /* This workaround is for win32 and cygwin; do not "optimize" */
2490 volatile int *parr = arr;
2491 printf("%d\n",parr[1]);
2492 @}
2493 @end example
2494
2495 Solution 2:
2496 @example
2497 --foo.h
2498 /* Note: auto-export is assumed (no __declspec(dllexport)) */
2499 #if (defined(_WIN32) || defined(__CYGWIN__)) && \
2500 !(defined(FOO_BUILD_DLL) || defined(FOO_STATIC))
2501 #define FOO_IMPORT __declspec(dllimport)
2502 #else
2503 #define FOO_IMPORT
2504 #endif
2505 extern FOO_IMPORT int arr[];
2506 --foo.c
2507 #include "foo.h"
2508 void main(int argc, char **argv)@{
2509 printf("%d\n",arr[1]);
2510 @}
2511 @end example
2512
2513 A fourth way to avoid this problem is to re-code your
2514 library to use a functional interface rather than a data interface
2515 for the offending variables (e.g. set_foo() and get_foo() accessor
2516 functions).
2517 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2518
2519 @kindex --disable-auto-import
2520 @item --disable-auto-import
2521 Do not attempt to do sophisticated linking of @code{_symbol} to
2522 @code{__imp__symbol} for DATA imports from DLLs.
2523 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2524
2525 @kindex --enable-runtime-pseudo-reloc
2526 @item --enable-runtime-pseudo-reloc
2527 If your code contains expressions described in --enable-auto-import section,
2528 that is, DATA imports from DLL with non-zero offset, this switch will create
2529 a vector of 'runtime pseudo relocations' which can be used by runtime
2530 environment to adjust references to such data in your client code.
2531 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2532
2533 @kindex --disable-runtime-pseudo-reloc
2534 @item --disable-runtime-pseudo-reloc
2535 Do not create pseudo relocations for non-zero offset DATA imports from
2536 DLLs. This is the default.
2537 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2538
2539 @kindex --enable-extra-pe-debug
2540 @item --enable-extra-pe-debug
2541 Show additional debug info related to auto-import symbol thunking.
2542 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2543
2544 @kindex --section-alignment
2545 @item --section-alignment
2546 Sets the section alignment. Sections in memory will always begin at
2547 addresses which are a multiple of this number. Defaults to 0x1000.
2548 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2549
2550 @cindex stack size
2551 @kindex --stack
2552 @item --stack @var{reserve}
2553 @itemx --stack @var{reserve},@var{commit}
2554 Specify the number of bytes of memory to reserve (and optionally commit)
2555 to be used as stack for this program. The default is 2Mb reserved, 4K
2556 committed.
2557 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2558
2559 @kindex --subsystem
2560 @item --subsystem @var{which}
2561 @itemx --subsystem @var{which}:@var{major}
2562 @itemx --subsystem @var{which}:@var{major}.@var{minor}
2563 Specifies the subsystem under which your program will execute. The
2564 legal values for @var{which} are @code{native}, @code{windows},
2565 @code{console}, @code{posix}, and @code{xbox}. You may optionally set
2566 the subsystem version also. Numeric values are also accepted for
2567 @var{which}.
2568 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2569
2570 The following options set flags in the @code{DllCharacteristics} field
2571 of the PE file header:
2572 [These options are specific to PE targeted ports of the linker]
2573
2574 @kindex --dynamicbase
2575 @item --dynamicbase
2576 The image base address may be relocated using address space layout
2577 randomization (ASLR). This feature was introduced with MS Windows
2578 Vista for i386 PE targets.
2579
2580 @kindex --forceinteg
2581 @item --forceinteg
2582 Code integrity checks are enforced.
2583
2584 @kindex --nxcompat
2585 @item --nxcompat
2586 The image is compatible with the Data Execution Prevention.
2587 This feature was introduced with MS Windows XP SP2 for i386 PE targets.
2588
2589 @kindex --no-isolation
2590 @item --no-isolation
2591 Although the image understands isolation, do not isolate the image.
2592
2593 @kindex --no-seh
2594 @item --no-seh
2595 The image does not use SEH. No SE handler may be called from
2596 this image.
2597
2598 @kindex --no-bind
2599 @item --no-bind
2600 Do not bind this image.
2601
2602 @kindex --wdmdriver
2603 @item --wdmdriver
2604 The driver uses the MS Windows Driver Model.
2605
2606 @kindex --tsaware
2607 @item --tsaware
2608 The image is Terminal Server aware.
2609
2610 @end table
2611
2612 @c man end
2613
2614 @ifset M68HC11
2615 @subsection Options specific to Motorola 68HC11 and 68HC12 targets
2616
2617 @c man begin OPTIONS
2618
2619 The 68HC11 and 68HC12 linkers support specific options to control the
2620 memory bank switching mapping and trampoline code generation.
2621
2622 @table @gcctabopt
2623
2624 @kindex --no-trampoline
2625 @item --no-trampoline
2626 This option disables the generation of trampoline. By default a trampoline
2627 is generated for each far function which is called using a @code{jsr}
2628 instruction (this happens when a pointer to a far function is taken).
2629
2630 @kindex --bank-window
2631 @item --bank-window @var{name}
2632 This option indicates to the linker the name of the memory region in
2633 the @samp{MEMORY} specification that describes the memory bank window.
2634 The definition of such region is then used by the linker to compute
2635 paging and addresses within the memory window.
2636
2637 @end table
2638
2639 @c man end
2640 @end ifset
2641
2642 @ifset M68K
2643 @subsection Options specific to Motorola 68K target
2644
2645 @c man begin OPTIONS
2646
2647 The following options are supported to control handling of GOT generation
2648 when linking for 68K targets.
2649
2650 @table @gcctabopt
2651
2652 @kindex --got
2653 @item --got=@var{type}
2654 This option tells the linker which GOT generation scheme to use.
2655 @var{type} should be one of @samp{single}, @samp{negative},
2656 @samp{multigot} or @samp{target}. For more information refer to the
2657 Info entry for @file{ld}.
2658
2659 @end table
2660
2661 @c man end
2662 @end ifset
2663
2664 @ifset UsesEnvVars
2665 @node Environment
2666 @section Environment Variables
2667
2668 @c man begin ENVIRONMENT
2669
2670 You can change the behaviour of @command{ld} with the environment variables
2671 @ifclear SingleFormat
2672 @code{GNUTARGET},
2673 @end ifclear
2674 @code{LDEMULATION} and @code{COLLECT_NO_DEMANGLE}.
2675
2676 @ifclear SingleFormat
2677 @kindex GNUTARGET
2678 @cindex default input format
2679 @code{GNUTARGET} determines the input-file object format if you don't
2680 use @samp{-b} (or its synonym @samp{--format}). Its value should be one
2681 of the BFD names for an input format (@pxref{BFD}). If there is no
2682 @code{GNUTARGET} in the environment, @command{ld} uses the natural format
2683 of the target. If @code{GNUTARGET} is set to @code{default} then BFD
2684 attempts to discover the input format by examining binary input files;
2685 this method often succeeds, but there are potential ambiguities, since
2686 there is no method of ensuring that the magic number used to specify
2687 object-file formats is unique. However, the configuration procedure for
2688 BFD on each system places the conventional format for that system first
2689 in the search-list, so ambiguities are resolved in favor of convention.
2690 @end ifclear
2691
2692 @kindex LDEMULATION
2693 @cindex default emulation
2694 @cindex emulation, default
2695 @code{LDEMULATION} determines the default emulation if you don't use the
2696 @samp{-m} option. The emulation can affect various aspects of linker
2697 behaviour, particularly the default linker script. You can list the
2698 available emulations with the @samp{--verbose} or @samp{-V} options. If
2699 the @samp{-m} option is not used, and the @code{LDEMULATION} environment
2700 variable is not defined, the default emulation depends upon how the
2701 linker was configured.
2702
2703 @kindex COLLECT_NO_DEMANGLE
2704 @cindex demangling, default
2705 Normally, the linker will default to demangling symbols. However, if
2706 @code{COLLECT_NO_DEMANGLE} is set in the environment, then it will
2707 default to not demangling symbols. This environment variable is used in
2708 a similar fashion by the @code{gcc} linker wrapper program. The default
2709 may be overridden by the @samp{--demangle} and @samp{--no-demangle}
2710 options.
2711
2712 @c man end
2713 @end ifset
2714
2715 @node Scripts
2716 @chapter Linker Scripts
2717
2718 @cindex scripts
2719 @cindex linker scripts
2720 @cindex command files
2721 Every link is controlled by a @dfn{linker script}. This script is
2722 written in the linker command language.
2723
2724 The main purpose of the linker script is to describe how the sections in
2725 the input files should be mapped into the output file, and to control
2726 the memory layout of the output file. Most linker scripts do nothing
2727 more than this. However, when necessary, the linker script can also
2728 direct the linker to perform many other operations, using the commands
2729 described below.
2730
2731 The linker always uses a linker script. If you do not supply one
2732 yourself, the linker will use a default script that is compiled into the
2733 linker executable. You can use the @samp{--verbose} command line option
2734 to display the default linker script. Certain command line options,
2735 such as @samp{-r} or @samp{-N}, will affect the default linker script.
2736
2737 You may supply your own linker script by using the @samp{-T} command
2738 line option. When you do this, your linker script will replace the
2739 default linker script.
2740
2741 You may also use linker scripts implicitly by naming them as input files
2742 to the linker, as though they were files to be linked. @xref{Implicit
2743 Linker Scripts}.
2744
2745 @menu
2746 * Basic Script Concepts:: Basic Linker Script Concepts
2747 * Script Format:: Linker Script Format
2748 * Simple Example:: Simple Linker Script Example
2749 * Simple Commands:: Simple Linker Script Commands
2750 * Assignments:: Assigning Values to Symbols
2751 * SECTIONS:: SECTIONS Command
2752 * MEMORY:: MEMORY Command
2753 * PHDRS:: PHDRS Command
2754 * VERSION:: VERSION Command
2755 * Expressions:: Expressions in Linker Scripts
2756 * Implicit Linker Scripts:: Implicit Linker Scripts
2757 @end menu
2758
2759 @node Basic Script Concepts
2760 @section Basic Linker Script Concepts
2761 @cindex linker script concepts
2762 We need to define some basic concepts and vocabulary in order to
2763 describe the linker script language.
2764
2765 The linker combines input files into a single output file. The output
2766 file and each input file are in a special data format known as an
2767 @dfn{object file format}. Each file is called an @dfn{object file}.
2768 The output file is often called an @dfn{executable}, but for our
2769 purposes we will also call it an object file. Each object file has,
2770 among other things, a list of @dfn{sections}. We sometimes refer to a
2771 section in an input file as an @dfn{input section}; similarly, a section
2772 in the output file is an @dfn{output section}.
2773
2774 Each section in an object file has a name and a size. Most sections
2775 also have an associated block of data, known as the @dfn{section
2776 contents}. A section may be marked as @dfn{loadable}, which mean that
2777 the contents should be loaded into memory when the output file is run.
2778 A section with no contents may be @dfn{allocatable}, which means that an
2779 area in memory should be set aside, but nothing in particular should be
2780 loaded there (in some cases this memory must be zeroed out). A section
2781 which is neither loadable nor allocatable typically contains some sort
2782 of debugging information.
2783
2784 Every loadable or allocatable output section has two addresses. The
2785 first is the @dfn{VMA}, or virtual memory address. This is the address
2786 the section will have when the output file is run. The second is the
2787 @dfn{LMA}, or load memory address. This is the address at which the
2788 section will be loaded. In most cases the two addresses will be the
2789 same. An example of when they might be different is when a data section
2790 is loaded into ROM, and then copied into RAM when the program starts up
2791 (this technique is often used to initialize global variables in a ROM
2792 based system). In this case the ROM address would be the LMA, and the
2793 RAM address would be the VMA.
2794
2795 You can see the sections in an object file by using the @code{objdump}
2796 program with the @samp{-h} option.
2797
2798 Every object file also has a list of @dfn{symbols}, known as the
2799 @dfn{symbol table}. A symbol may be defined or undefined. Each symbol
2800 has a name, and each defined symbol has an address, among other
2801 information. If you compile a C or C++ program into an object file, you
2802 will get a defined symbol for every defined function and global or
2803 static variable. Every undefined function or global variable which is
2804 referenced in the input file will become an undefined symbol.
2805
2806 You can see the symbols in an object file by using the @code{nm}
2807 program, or by using the @code{objdump} program with the @samp{-t}
2808 option.
2809
2810 @node Script Format
2811 @section Linker Script Format
2812 @cindex linker script format
2813 Linker scripts are text files.
2814
2815 You write a linker script as a series of commands. Each command is
2816 either a keyword, possibly followed by arguments, or an assignment to a
2817 symbol. You may separate commands using semicolons. Whitespace is
2818 generally ignored.
2819
2820 Strings such as file or format names can normally be entered directly.
2821 If the file name contains a character such as a comma which would
2822 otherwise serve to separate file names, you may put the file name in
2823 double quotes. There is no way to use a double quote character in a
2824 file name.
2825
2826 You may include comments in linker scripts just as in C, delimited by
2827 @samp{/*} and @samp{*/}. As in C, comments are syntactically equivalent
2828 to whitespace.
2829
2830 @node Simple Example
2831 @section Simple Linker Script Example
2832 @cindex linker script example
2833 @cindex example of linker script
2834 Many linker scripts are fairly simple.
2835
2836 The simplest possible linker script has just one command:
2837 @samp{SECTIONS}. You use the @samp{SECTIONS} command to describe the
2838 memory layout of the output file.
2839
2840 The @samp{SECTIONS} command is a powerful command. Here we will
2841 describe a simple use of it. Let's assume your program consists only of
2842 code, initialized data, and uninitialized data. These will be in the
2843 @samp{.text}, @samp{.data}, and @samp{.bss} sections, respectively.
2844 Let's assume further that these are the only sections which appear in
2845 your input files.
2846
2847 For this example, let's say that the code should be loaded at address
2848 0x10000, and that the data should start at address 0x8000000. Here is a
2849 linker script which will do that:
2850 @smallexample
2851 SECTIONS
2852 @{
2853 . = 0x10000;
2854 .text : @{ *(.text) @}
2855 . = 0x8000000;
2856 .data : @{ *(.data) @}
2857 .bss : @{ *(.bss) @}
2858 @}
2859 @end smallexample
2860
2861 You write the @samp{SECTIONS} command as the keyword @samp{SECTIONS},
2862 followed by a series of symbol assignments and output section
2863 descriptions enclosed in curly braces.
2864
2865 The first line inside the @samp{SECTIONS} command of the above example
2866 sets the value of the special symbol @samp{.}, which is the location
2867 counter. If you do not specify the address of an output section in some
2868 other way (other ways are described later), the address is set from the
2869 current value of the location counter. The location counter is then
2870 incremented by the size of the output section. At the start of the
2871 @samp{SECTIONS} command, the location counter has the value @samp{0}.
2872
2873 The second line defines an output section, @samp{.text}. The colon is
2874 required syntax which may be ignored for now. Within the curly braces
2875 after the output section name, you list the names of the input sections
2876 which should be placed into this output section. The @samp{*} is a
2877 wildcard which matches any file name. The expression @samp{*(.text)}
2878 means all @samp{.text} input sections in all input files.
2879
2880 Since the location counter is @samp{0x10000} when the output section
2881 @samp{.text} is defined, the linker will set the address of the
2882 @samp{.text} section in the output file to be @samp{0x10000}.
2883
2884 The remaining lines define the @samp{.data} and @samp{.bss} sections in
2885 the output file. The linker will place the @samp{.data} output section
2886 at address @samp{0x8000000}. After the linker places the @samp{.data}
2887 output section, the value of the location counter will be
2888 @samp{0x8000000} plus the size of the @samp{.data} output section. The
2889 effect is that the linker will place the @samp{.bss} output section
2890 immediately after the @samp{.data} output section in memory.
2891
2892 The linker will ensure that each output section has the required
2893 alignment, by increasing the location counter if necessary. In this
2894 example, the specified addresses for the @samp{.text} and @samp{.data}
2895 sections will probably satisfy any alignment constraints, but the linker
2896 may have to create a small gap between the @samp{.data} and @samp{.bss}
2897 sections.
2898
2899 That's it! That's a simple and complete linker script.
2900
2901 @node Simple Commands
2902 @section Simple Linker Script Commands
2903 @cindex linker script simple commands
2904 In this section we describe the simple linker script commands.
2905
2906 @menu
2907 * Entry Point:: Setting the entry point
2908 * File Commands:: Commands dealing with files
2909 @ifclear SingleFormat
2910 * Format Commands:: Commands dealing with object file formats
2911 @end ifclear
2912
2913 * REGION_ALIAS:: Assign alias names to memory regions
2914 * Miscellaneous Commands:: Other linker script commands
2915 @end menu
2916
2917 @node Entry Point
2918 @subsection Setting the Entry Point
2919 @kindex ENTRY(@var{symbol})
2920 @cindex start of execution
2921 @cindex first instruction
2922 @cindex entry point
2923 The first instruction to execute in a program is called the @dfn{entry
2924 point}. You can use the @code{ENTRY} linker script command to set the
2925 entry point. The argument is a symbol name:
2926 @smallexample
2927 ENTRY(@var{symbol})
2928 @end smallexample
2929
2930 There are several ways to set the entry point. The linker will set the
2931 entry point by trying each of the following methods in order, and
2932 stopping when one of them succeeds:
2933 @itemize @bullet
2934 @item
2935 the @samp{-e} @var{entry} command-line option;
2936 @item
2937 the @code{ENTRY(@var{symbol})} command in a linker script;
2938 @item
2939 the value of a target specific symbol, if it is defined; For many
2940 targets this is @code{start}, but PE and BeOS based systems for example
2941 check a list of possible entry symbols, matching the first one found.
2942 @item
2943 the address of the first byte of the @samp{.text} section, if present;
2944 @item
2945 The address @code{0}.
2946 @end itemize
2947
2948 @node File Commands
2949 @subsection Commands Dealing with Files
2950 @cindex linker script file commands
2951 Several linker script commands deal with files.
2952
2953 @table @code
2954 @item INCLUDE @var{filename}
2955 @kindex INCLUDE @var{filename}
2956 @cindex including a linker script
2957 Include the linker script @var{filename} at this point. The file will
2958 be searched for in the current directory, and in any directory specified
2959 with the @option{-L} option. You can nest calls to @code{INCLUDE} up to
2960 10 levels deep.
2961
2962 You can place @code{INCLUDE} directives at the top level, in @code{MEMORY} or
2963 @code{SECTIONS} commands, or in output section descriptions.
2964
2965 @item INPUT(@var{file}, @var{file}, @dots{})
2966 @itemx INPUT(@var{file} @var{file} @dots{})
2967 @kindex INPUT(@var{files})
2968 @cindex input files in linker scripts
2969 @cindex input object files in linker scripts
2970 @cindex linker script input object files
2971 The @code{INPUT} command directs the linker to include the named files
2972 in the link, as though they were named on the command line.
2973
2974 For example, if you always want to include @file{subr.o} any time you do
2975 a link, but you can't be bothered to put it on every link command line,
2976 then you can put @samp{INPUT (subr.o)} in your linker script.
2977
2978 In fact, if you like, you can list all of your input files in the linker
2979 script, and then invoke the linker with nothing but a @samp{-T} option.
2980
2981 In case a @dfn{sysroot prefix} is configured, and the filename starts
2982 with the @samp{/} character, and the script being processed was
2983 located inside the @dfn{sysroot prefix}, the filename will be looked
2984 for in the @dfn{sysroot prefix}. Otherwise, the linker will try to
2985 open the file in the current directory. If it is not found, the
2986 linker will search through the archive library search path. See the
2987 description of @samp{-L} in @ref{Options,,Command Line Options}.
2988
2989 If you use @samp{INPUT (-l@var{file})}, @command{ld} will transform the
2990 name to @code{lib@var{file}.a}, as with the command line argument
2991 @samp{-l}.
2992
2993 When you use the @code{INPUT} command in an implicit linker script, the
2994 files will be included in the link at the point at which the linker
2995 script file is included. This can affect archive searching.
2996
2997 @item GROUP(@var{file}, @var{file}, @dots{})
2998 @itemx GROUP(@var{file} @var{file} @dots{})
2999 @kindex GROUP(@var{files})
3000 @cindex grouping input files
3001 The @code{GROUP} command is like @code{INPUT}, except that the named
3002 files should all be archives, and they are searched repeatedly until no
3003 new undefined references are created. See the description of @samp{-(}
3004 in @ref{Options,,Command Line Options}.
3005
3006 @item AS_NEEDED(@var{file}, @var{file}, @dots{})
3007 @itemx AS_NEEDED(@var{file} @var{file} @dots{})
3008 @kindex AS_NEEDED(@var{files})
3009 This construct can appear only inside of the @code{INPUT} or @code{GROUP}
3010 commands, among other filenames. The files listed will be handled
3011 as if they appear directly in the @code{INPUT} or @code{GROUP} commands,
3012 with the exception of ELF shared libraries, that will be added only
3013 when they are actually needed. This construct essentially enables
3014 @option{--as-needed} option for all the files listed inside of it
3015 and restores previous @option{--as-needed} resp. @option{--no-as-needed}
3016 setting afterwards.
3017
3018 @item OUTPUT(@var{filename})
3019 @kindex OUTPUT(@var{filename})
3020 @cindex output file name in linker script
3021 The @code{OUTPUT} command names the output file. Using
3022 @code{OUTPUT(@var{filename})} in the linker script is exactly like using
3023 @samp{-o @var{filename}} on the command line (@pxref{Options,,Command
3024 Line Options}). If both are used, the command line option takes
3025 precedence.
3026
3027 You can use the @code{OUTPUT} command to define a default name for the
3028 output file other than the usual default of @file{a.out}.
3029
3030 @item SEARCH_DIR(@var{path})
3031 @kindex SEARCH_DIR(@var{path})
3032 @cindex library search path in linker script
3033 @cindex archive search path in linker script
3034 @cindex search path in linker script
3035 The @code{SEARCH_DIR} command adds @var{path} to the list of paths where
3036 @command{ld} looks for archive libraries. Using
3037 @code{SEARCH_DIR(@var{path})} is exactly like using @samp{-L @var{path}}
3038 on the command line (@pxref{Options,,Command Line Options}). If both
3039 are used, then the linker will search both paths. Paths specified using
3040 the command line option are searched first.
3041
3042 @item STARTUP(@var{filename})
3043 @kindex STARTUP(@var{filename})
3044 @cindex first input file
3045 The @code{STARTUP} command is just like the @code{INPUT} command, except
3046 that @var{filename} will become the first input file to be linked, as
3047 though it were specified first on the command line. This may be useful
3048 when using a system in which the entry point is always the start of the
3049 first file.
3050 @end table
3051
3052 @ifclear SingleFormat
3053 @node Format Commands
3054 @subsection Commands Dealing with Object File Formats
3055 A couple of linker script commands deal with object file formats.
3056
3057 @table @code
3058 @item OUTPUT_FORMAT(@var{bfdname})
3059 @itemx OUTPUT_FORMAT(@var{default}, @var{big}, @var{little})
3060 @kindex OUTPUT_FORMAT(@var{bfdname})
3061 @cindex output file format in linker script
3062 The @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} command names the BFD format to use for the
3063 output file (@pxref{BFD}). Using @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT(@var{bfdname})} is
3064 exactly like using @samp{--oformat @var{bfdname}} on the command line
3065 (@pxref{Options,,Command Line Options}). If both are used, the command
3066 line option takes precedence.
3067
3068 You can use @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} with three arguments to use different
3069 formats based on the @samp{-EB} and @samp{-EL} command line options.
3070 This permits the linker script to set the output format based on the
3071 desired endianness.
3072
3073 If neither @samp{-EB} nor @samp{-EL} are used, then the output format
3074 will be the first argument, @var{default}. If @samp{-EB} is used, the
3075 output format will be the second argument, @var{big}. If @samp{-EL} is
3076 used, the output format will be the third argument, @var{little}.
3077
3078 For example, the default linker script for the MIPS ELF target uses this
3079 command:
3080 @smallexample
3081 OUTPUT_FORMAT(elf32-bigmips, elf32-bigmips, elf32-littlemips)
3082 @end smallexample
3083 This says that the default format for the output file is
3084 @samp{elf32-bigmips}, but if the user uses the @samp{-EL} command line
3085 option, the output file will be created in the @samp{elf32-littlemips}
3086 format.
3087
3088 @item TARGET(@var{bfdname})
3089 @kindex TARGET(@var{bfdname})
3090 @cindex input file format in linker script
3091 The @code{TARGET} command names the BFD format to use when reading input
3092 files. It affects subsequent @code{INPUT} and @code{GROUP} commands.
3093 This command is like using @samp{-b @var{bfdname}} on the command line
3094 (@pxref{Options,,Command Line Options}). If the @code{TARGET} command
3095 is used but @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} is not, then the last @code{TARGET}
3096 command is also used to set the format for the output file. @xref{BFD}.
3097 @end table
3098 @end ifclear
3099
3100 @node REGION_ALIAS
3101 @subsection Assign alias names to memory regions
3102 @kindex REGION_ALIAS(@var{alias}, @var{region})
3103 @cindex region alias
3104 @cindex region names
3105
3106 Alias names can be added to existing memory regions created with the
3107 @ref{MEMORY} command. Each name corresponds to at most one memory region.
3108
3109 @smallexample
3110 REGION_ALIAS(@var{alias}, @var{region})
3111 @end smallexample
3112
3113 The @code{REGION_ALIAS} function creates an alias name @var{alias} for the
3114 memory region @var{region}. This allows a flexible mapping of output sections
3115 to memory regions. An example follows.
3116
3117 Suppose we have an application for embedded systems which come with various
3118 memory storage devices. All have a general purpose, volatile memory @code{RAM}
3119 that allows code execution or data storage. Some may have a read-only,
3120 non-volatile memory @code{ROM} that allows code execution and read-only data
3121 access. The last variant is a read-only, non-volatile memory @code{ROM2} with
3122 read-only data access and no code execution capability. We have four output
3123 sections:
3124
3125 @itemize @bullet
3126 @item
3127 @code{.text} program code;
3128 @item
3129 @code{.rodata} read-only data;
3130 @item
3131 @code{.data} read-write initialized data;
3132 @item
3133 @code{.bss} read-write zero initialized data.
3134 @end itemize
3135
3136 The goal is to provide a linker command file that contains a system independent
3137 part defining the output sections and a system dependent part mapping the
3138 output sections to the memory regions available on the system. Our embedded
3139 systems come with three different memory setups @code{A}, @code{B} and
3140 @code{C}:
3141 @multitable @columnfractions .25 .25 .25 .25
3142 @item Section @tab Variant A @tab Variant B @tab Variant C
3143 @item .text @tab RAM @tab ROM @tab ROM
3144 @item .rodata @tab RAM @tab ROM @tab ROM2
3145 @item .data @tab RAM @tab RAM/ROM @tab RAM/ROM2
3146 @item .bss @tab RAM @tab RAM @tab RAM
3147 @end multitable
3148 The notation @code{RAM/ROM} or @code{RAM/ROM2} means that this section is
3149 loaded into region @code{ROM} or @code{ROM2} respectively. Please note that
3150 the load address of the @code{.data} section starts in all three variants at
3151 the end of the @code{.rodata} section.
3152
3153 The base linker script that deals with the output sections follows. It
3154 includes the system dependent @code{linkcmds.memory} file that describes the
3155 memory layout:
3156 @smallexample
3157 INCLUDE linkcmds.memory
3158
3159 SECTIONS
3160 @{
3161 .text :
3162 @{
3163 *(.text)
3164 @} > REGION_TEXT
3165 .rodata :
3166 @{
3167 *(.rodata)
3168 rodata_end = .;
3169 @} > REGION_RODATA
3170 .data : AT (rodata_end)
3171 @{
3172 data_start = .;
3173 *(.data)
3174 @} > REGION_DATA
3175 data_size = SIZEOF(.data);
3176 data_load_start = LOADADDR(.data);
3177 .bss :
3178 @{
3179 *(.bss)
3180 @} > REGION_BSS
3181 @}
3182 @end smallexample
3183
3184 Now we need three different @code{linkcmds.memory} files to define memory
3185 regions and alias names. The content of @code{linkcmds.memory} for the three
3186 variants @code{A}, @code{B} and @code{C}:
3187 @table @code
3188 @item A
3189 Here everything goes into the @code{RAM}.
3190 @smallexample
3191 MEMORY
3192 @{
3193 RAM : ORIGIN = 0, LENGTH = 4M
3194 @}
3195
3196 REGION_ALIAS("REGION_TEXT", RAM);
3197 REGION_ALIAS("REGION_RODATA", RAM);
3198 REGION_ALIAS("REGION_DATA", RAM);
3199 REGION_ALIAS("REGION_BSS", RAM);
3200 @end smallexample
3201 @item B
3202 Program code and read-only data go into the @code{ROM}. Read-write data goes
3203 into the @code{RAM}. An image of the initialized data is loaded into the
3204 @code{ROM} and will be copied during system start into the @code{RAM}.
3205 @smallexample
3206 MEMORY
3207 @{
3208 ROM : ORIGIN = 0, LENGTH = 3M
3209 RAM : ORIGIN = 0x10000000, LENGTH = 1M
3210 @}
3211
3212 REGION_ALIAS("REGION_TEXT", ROM);
3213 REGION_ALIAS("REGION_RODATA", ROM);
3214 REGION_ALIAS("REGION_DATA", RAM);
3215 REGION_ALIAS("REGION_BSS", RAM);
3216 @end smallexample
3217 @item C
3218 Program code goes into the @code{ROM}. Read-only data goes into the
3219 @code{ROM2}. Read-write data goes into the @code{RAM}. An image of the
3220 initialized data is loaded into the @code{ROM2} and will be copied during
3221 system start into the @code{RAM}.
3222 @smallexample
3223 MEMORY
3224 @{
3225 ROM : ORIGIN = 0, LENGTH = 2M
3226 ROM2 : ORIGIN = 0x10000000, LENGTH = 1M
3227 RAM : ORIGIN = 0x20000000, LENGTH = 1M
3228 @}
3229
3230 REGION_ALIAS("REGION_TEXT", ROM);
3231 REGION_ALIAS("REGION_RODATA", ROM2);
3232 REGION_ALIAS("REGION_DATA", RAM);
3233 REGION_ALIAS("REGION_BSS", RAM);
3234 @end smallexample
3235 @end table
3236
3237 It is possible to write a common system initialization routine to copy the
3238 @code{.data} section from @code{ROM} or @code{ROM2} into the @code{RAM} if
3239 necessary:
3240 @smallexample
3241 #include <string.h>
3242
3243 extern char data_start [];
3244 extern char data_size [];
3245 extern char data_load_start [];
3246
3247 void copy_data(void)
3248 @{
3249 if (data_start != data_load_start)
3250 @{
3251 memcpy(data_start, data_load_start, (size_t) data_size);
3252 @}
3253 @}
3254 @end smallexample
3255
3256 @node Miscellaneous Commands
3257 @subsection Other Linker Script Commands
3258 There are a few other linker scripts commands.
3259
3260 @table @code
3261 @item ASSERT(@var{exp}, @var{message})
3262 @kindex ASSERT
3263 @cindex assertion in linker script
3264 Ensure that @var{exp} is non-zero. If it is zero, then exit the linker
3265 with an error code, and print @var{message}.
3266
3267 @item EXTERN(@var{symbol} @var{symbol} @dots{})
3268 @kindex EXTERN
3269 @cindex undefined symbol in linker script
3270 Force @var{symbol} to be entered in the output file as an undefined
3271 symbol. Doing this may, for example, trigger linking of additional
3272 modules from standard libraries. You may list several @var{symbol}s for
3273 each @code{EXTERN}, and you may use @code{EXTERN} multiple times. This
3274 command has the same effect as the @samp{-u} command-line option.
3275
3276 @item FORCE_COMMON_ALLOCATION
3277 @kindex FORCE_COMMON_ALLOCATION
3278 @cindex common allocation in linker script
3279 This command has the same effect as the @samp{-d} command-line option:
3280 to make @command{ld} assign space to common symbols even if a relocatable
3281 output file is specified (@samp{-r}).
3282
3283 @item INHIBIT_COMMON_ALLOCATION
3284 @kindex INHIBIT_COMMON_ALLOCATION
3285 @cindex common allocation in linker script
3286 This command has the same effect as the @samp{--no-define-common}
3287 command-line option: to make @code{ld} omit the assignment of addresses
3288 to common symbols even for a non-relocatable output file.
3289
3290 @item INSERT [ AFTER | BEFORE ] @var{output_section}
3291 @kindex INSERT
3292 @cindex insert user script into default script
3293 This command is typically used in a script specified by @samp{-T} to
3294 augment the default @code{SECTIONS} with, for example, overlays. It
3295 inserts all prior linker script statements after (or before)
3296 @var{output_section}, and also causes @samp{-T} to not override the
3297 default linker script. The exact insertion point is as for orphan
3298 sections. @xref{Location Counter}. The insertion happens after the
3299 linker has mapped input sections to output sections. Prior to the
3300 insertion, since @samp{-T} scripts are parsed before the default
3301 linker script, statements in the @samp{-T} script occur before the
3302 default linker script statements in the internal linker representation
3303 of the script. In particular, input section assignments will be made
3304 to @samp{-T} output sections before those in the default script. Here
3305 is an example of how a @samp{-T} script using @code{INSERT} might look:
3306
3307 @smallexample
3308 SECTIONS
3309 @{
3310 OVERLAY :
3311 @{
3312 .ov1 @{ ov1*(.text) @}
3313 .ov2 @{ ov2*(.text) @}
3314 @}
3315 @}
3316 INSERT AFTER .text;
3317 @end smallexample
3318
3319 @item NOCROSSREFS(@var{section} @var{section} @dots{})
3320 @kindex NOCROSSREFS(@var{sections})
3321 @cindex cross references
3322 This command may be used to tell @command{ld} to issue an error about any
3323 references among certain output sections.
3324
3325 In certain types of programs, particularly on embedded systems when
3326 using overlays, when one section is loaded into memory, another section
3327 will not be. Any direct references between the two sections would be
3328 errors. For example, it would be an error if code in one section called
3329 a function defined in the other section.
3330
3331 The @code{NOCROSSREFS} command takes a list of output section names. If
3332 @command{ld} detects any cross references between the sections, it reports
3333 an error and returns a non-zero exit status. Note that the
3334 @code{NOCROSSREFS} command uses output section names, not input section
3335 names.
3336
3337 @ifclear SingleFormat
3338 @item OUTPUT_ARCH(@var{bfdarch})
3339 @kindex OUTPUT_ARCH(@var{bfdarch})
3340 @cindex machine architecture
3341 @cindex architecture
3342 Specify a particular output machine architecture. The argument is one
3343 of the names used by the BFD library (@pxref{BFD}). You can see the
3344 architecture of an object file by using the @code{objdump} program with
3345 the @samp{-f} option.
3346 @end ifclear
3347 @end table
3348
3349 @node Assignments
3350 @section Assigning Values to Symbols
3351 @cindex assignment in scripts
3352 @cindex symbol definition, scripts
3353 @cindex variables, defining
3354 You may assign a value to a symbol in a linker script. This will define
3355 the symbol and place it into the symbol table with a global scope.
3356
3357 @menu
3358 * Simple Assignments:: Simple Assignments
3359 * PROVIDE:: PROVIDE
3360 * PROVIDE_HIDDEN:: PROVIDE_HIDDEN
3361 * Source Code Reference:: How to use a linker script defined symbol in source code
3362 @end menu
3363
3364 @node Simple Assignments
3365 @subsection Simple Assignments
3366
3367 You may assign to a symbol using any of the C assignment operators:
3368
3369 @table @code
3370 @item @var{symbol} = @var{expression} ;
3371 @itemx @var{symbol} += @var{expression} ;
3372 @itemx @var{symbol} -= @var{expression} ;
3373 @itemx @var{symbol} *= @var{expression} ;
3374 @itemx @var{symbol} /= @var{expression} ;
3375 @itemx @var{symbol} <<= @var{expression} ;
3376 @itemx @var{symbol} >>= @var{expression} ;
3377 @itemx @var{symbol} &= @var{expression} ;
3378 @itemx @var{symbol} |= @var{expression} ;
3379 @end table
3380
3381 The first case will define @var{symbol} to the value of
3382 @var{expression}. In the other cases, @var{symbol} must already be
3383 defined, and the value will be adjusted accordingly.
3384
3385 The special symbol name @samp{.} indicates the location counter. You
3386 may only use this within a @code{SECTIONS} command. @xref{Location Counter}.
3387
3388 The semicolon after @var{expression} is required.
3389
3390 Expressions are defined below; see @ref{Expressions}.
3391
3392 You may write symbol assignments as commands in their own right, or as
3393 statements within a @code{SECTIONS} command, or as part of an output
3394 section description in a @code{SECTIONS} command.
3395
3396 The section of the symbol will be set from the section of the
3397 expression; for more information, see @ref{Expression Section}.
3398
3399 Here is an example showing the three different places that symbol
3400 assignments may be used:
3401
3402 @smallexample
3403 floating_point = 0;
3404 SECTIONS
3405 @{
3406 .text :
3407 @{
3408 *(.text)
3409 _etext = .;
3410 @}
3411 _bdata = (. + 3) & ~ 3;
3412 .data : @{ *(.data) @}
3413 @}
3414 @end smallexample
3415 @noindent
3416 In this example, the symbol @samp{floating_point} will be defined as
3417 zero. The symbol @samp{_etext} will be defined as the address following
3418 the last @samp{.text} input section. The symbol @samp{_bdata} will be
3419 defined as the address following the @samp{.text} output section aligned
3420 upward to a 4 byte boundary.
3421
3422 @node PROVIDE
3423 @subsection PROVIDE
3424 @cindex PROVIDE
3425 In some cases, it is desirable for a linker script to define a symbol
3426 only if it is referenced and is not defined by any object included in
3427 the link. For example, traditional linkers defined the symbol
3428 @samp{etext}. However, ANSI C requires that the user be able to use
3429 @samp{etext} as a function name without encountering an error. The
3430 @code{PROVIDE} keyword may be used to define a symbol, such as
3431 @samp{etext}, only if it is referenced but not defined. The syntax is
3432 @code{PROVIDE(@var{symbol} = @var{expression})}.
3433
3434 Here is an example of using @code{PROVIDE} to define @samp{etext}:
3435 @smallexample
3436 SECTIONS
3437 @{
3438 .text :
3439 @{
3440 *(.text)
3441 _etext = .;
3442 PROVIDE(etext = .);
3443 @}
3444 @}
3445 @end smallexample
3446
3447 In this example, if the program defines @samp{_etext} (with a leading
3448 underscore), the linker will give a multiple definition error. If, on
3449 the other hand, the program defines @samp{etext} (with no leading
3450 underscore), the linker will silently use the definition in the program.
3451 If the program references @samp{etext} but does not define it, the
3452 linker will use the definition in the linker script.
3453
3454 @node PROVIDE_HIDDEN
3455 @subsection PROVIDE_HIDDEN
3456 @cindex PROVIDE_HIDDEN
3457 Similar to @code{PROVIDE}. For ELF targeted ports, the symbol will be
3458 hidden and won't be exported.
3459
3460 @node Source Code Reference
3461 @subsection Source Code Reference
3462
3463 Accessing a linker script defined variable from source code is not
3464 intuitive. In particular a linker script symbol is not equivalent to
3465 a variable declaration in a high level language, it is instead a
3466 symbol that does not have a value.
3467
3468 Before going further, it is important to note that compilers often
3469 transform names in the source code into different names when they are
3470 stored in the symbol table. For example, Fortran compilers commonly
3471 prepend or append an underscore, and C++ performs extensive @samp{name
3472 mangling}. Therefore there might be a discrepancy between the name
3473 of a variable as it is used in source code and the name of the same
3474 variable as it is defined in a linker script. For example in C a
3475 linker script variable might be referred to as:
3476
3477 @smallexample
3478 extern int foo;
3479 @end smallexample
3480
3481 But in the linker script it might be defined as:
3482
3483 @smallexample
3484 _foo = 1000;
3485 @end smallexample
3486
3487 In the remaining examples however it is assumed that no name
3488 transformation has taken place.
3489
3490 When a symbol is declared in a high level language such as C, two
3491 things happen. The first is that the compiler reserves enough space
3492 in the program's memory to hold the @emph{value} of the symbol. The
3493 second is that the compiler creates an entry in the program's symbol
3494 table which holds the symbol's @emph{address}. ie the symbol table
3495 contains the address of the block of memory holding the symbol's
3496 value. So for example the following C declaration, at file scope:
3497
3498 @smallexample
3499 int foo = 1000;
3500 @end smallexample
3501
3502 creates a entry called @samp{foo} in the symbol table. This entry
3503 holds the address of an @samp{int} sized block of memory where the
3504 number 1000 is initially stored.
3505
3506 When a program references a symbol the compiler generates code that
3507 first accesses the symbol table to find the address of the symbol's
3508 memory block and then code to read the value from that memory block.
3509 So:
3510
3511 @smallexample
3512 foo = 1;
3513 @end smallexample
3514
3515 looks up the symbol @samp{foo} in the symbol table, gets the address
3516 associated with this symbol and then writes the value 1 into that
3517 address. Whereas:
3518
3519 @smallexample
3520 int * a = & foo;
3521 @end smallexample
3522
3523 looks up the symbol @samp{foo} in the symbol table, gets it address
3524 and then copies this address into the block of memory associated with
3525 the variable @samp{a}.
3526
3527 Linker scripts symbol declarations, by contrast, create an entry in
3528 the symbol table but do not assign any memory to them. Thus they are
3529 an address without a value. So for example the linker script definition:
3530
3531 @smallexample
3532 foo = 1000;
3533 @end smallexample
3534
3535 creates an entry in the symbol table called @samp{foo} which holds
3536 the address of memory location 1000, but nothing special is stored at
3537 address 1000. This means that you cannot access the @emph{value} of a
3538 linker script defined symbol - it has no value - all you can do is
3539 access the @emph{address} of a linker script defined symbol.
3540
3541 Hence when you are using a linker script defined symbol in source code
3542 you should always take the address of the symbol, and never attempt to
3543 use its value. For example suppose you want to copy the contents of a
3544 section of memory called .ROM into a section called .FLASH and the
3545 linker script contains these declarations:
3546
3547 @smallexample
3548 @group
3549 start_of_ROM = .ROM;
3550 end_of_ROM = .ROM + sizeof (.ROM) - 1;
3551 start_of_FLASH = .FLASH;
3552 @end group
3553 @end smallexample
3554
3555 Then the C source code to perform the copy would be:
3556
3557 @smallexample
3558 @group
3559 extern char start_of_ROM, end_of_ROM, start_of_FLASH;
3560
3561 memcpy (& start_of_FLASH, & start_of_ROM, & end_of_ROM - & start_of_ROM);
3562 @end group
3563 @end smallexample
3564
3565 Note the use of the @samp{&} operators. These are correct.
3566
3567 @node SECTIONS
3568 @section SECTIONS Command
3569 @kindex SECTIONS
3570 The @code{SECTIONS} command tells the linker how to map input sections
3571 into output sections, and how to place the output sections in memory.
3572
3573 The format of the @code{SECTIONS} command is:
3574 @smallexample
3575 SECTIONS
3576 @{
3577 @var{sections-command}
3578 @var{sections-command}
3579 @dots{}
3580 @}
3581 @end smallexample
3582
3583 Each @var{sections-command} may of be one of the following:
3584
3585 @itemize @bullet
3586 @item
3587 an @code{ENTRY} command (@pxref{Entry Point,,Entry command})
3588 @item
3589 a symbol assignment (@pxref{Assignments})
3590 @item
3591 an output section description
3592 @item
3593 an overlay description
3594 @end itemize
3595
3596 The @code{ENTRY} command and symbol assignments are permitted inside the
3597 @code{SECTIONS} command for convenience in using the location counter in
3598 those commands. This can also make the linker script easier to
3599 understand because you can use those commands at meaningful points in
3600 the layout of the output file.
3601
3602 Output section descriptions and overlay descriptions are described
3603 below.
3604
3605 If you do not use a @code{SECTIONS} command in your linker script, the
3606 linker will place each input section into an identically named output
3607 section in the order that the sections are first encountered in the
3608 input files. If all input sections are present in the first file, for
3609 example, the order of sections in the output file will match the order
3610 in the first input file. The first section will be at address zero.
3611
3612 @menu
3613 * Output Section Description:: Output section description
3614 * Output Section Name:: Output section name
3615 * Output Section Address:: Output section address
3616 * Input Section:: Input section description
3617 * Output Section Data:: Output section data
3618 * Output Section Keywords:: Output section keywords
3619 * Output Section Discarding:: Output section discarding
3620 * Output Section Attributes:: Output section attributes
3621 * Overlay Description:: Overlay description
3622 @end menu
3623
3624 @node Output Section Description
3625 @subsection Output Section Description
3626 The full description of an output section looks like this:
3627 @smallexample
3628 @group
3629 @var{section} [@var{address}] [(@var{type})] :
3630 [AT(@var{lma})]
3631 [ALIGN(@var{section_align})]
3632 [SUBALIGN(@var{subsection_align})]
3633 [@var{constraint}]
3634 @{
3635 @var{output-section-command}
3636 @var{output-section-command}
3637 @dots{}
3638 @} [>@var{region}] [AT>@var{lma_region}] [:@var{phdr} :@var{phdr} @dots{}] [=@var{fillexp}]
3639 @end group
3640 @end smallexample
3641
3642 Most output sections do not use most of the optional section attributes.
3643
3644 The whitespace around @var{section} is required, so that the section
3645 name is unambiguous. The colon and the curly braces are also required.
3646 The line breaks and other white space are optional.
3647
3648 Each @var{output-section-command} may be one of the following:
3649
3650 @itemize @bullet
3651 @item
3652 a symbol assignment (@pxref{Assignments})
3653 @item
3654 an input section description (@pxref{Input Section})
3655 @item
3656 data values to include directly (@pxref{Output Section Data})
3657 @item
3658 a special output section keyword (@pxref{Output Section Keywords})
3659 @end itemize
3660
3661 @node Output Section Name
3662 @subsection Output Section Name
3663 @cindex name, section
3664 @cindex section name
3665 The name of the output section is @var{section}. @var{section} must
3666 meet the constraints of your output format. In formats which only
3667 support a limited number of sections, such as @code{a.out}, the name
3668 must be one of the names supported by the format (@code{a.out}, for
3669 example, allows only @samp{.text}, @samp{.data} or @samp{.bss}). If the
3670 output format supports any number of sections, but with numbers and not
3671 names (as is the case for Oasys), the name should be supplied as a
3672 quoted numeric string. A section name may consist of any sequence of
3673 characters, but a name which contains any unusual characters such as
3674 commas must be quoted.
3675
3676 The output section name @samp{/DISCARD/} is special; @ref{Output Section
3677 Discarding}.
3678
3679 @node Output Section Address
3680 @subsection Output Section Address
3681 @cindex address, section
3682 @cindex section address
3683 The @var{address} is an expression for the VMA (the virtual memory
3684 address) of the output section. This address is optional, but if it
3685 is provided then the output address will be set exactly as specified.
3686
3687 If the output address is not specified then one will be chosen for the
3688 section, based on the heuristic below. This address will be adjusted
3689 to fit the alignment requirement of the output section. The
3690 alignment requirement is the strictest alignment of any input section
3691 contained within the output section.
3692
3693 The output section address heuristic is as follows:
3694
3695 @itemize @bullet
3696 @item
3697 If an output memory @var{region} is set for the section then it
3698 is added to this region and its address will be the next free address
3699 in that region.
3700
3701 @item
3702 If the MEMORY command has been used to create a list of memory
3703 regions then the first region which has attributes compatible with the
3704 section is selected to contain it. The section's output address will
3705 be the next free address in that region; @ref{MEMORY}.
3706
3707 @item
3708 If no memory regions were specified, or none match the section then
3709 the output address will be based on the current value of the location
3710 counter.
3711 @end itemize
3712
3713 @noindent
3714 For example:
3715
3716 @smallexample
3717 .text . : @{ *(.text) @}
3718 @end smallexample
3719
3720 @noindent
3721 and
3722
3723 @smallexample
3724 .text : @{ *(.text) @}
3725 @end smallexample
3726
3727 @noindent
3728 are subtly different. The first will set the address of the
3729 @samp{.text} output section to the current value of the location
3730 counter. The second will set it to the current value of the location
3731 counter aligned to the strictest alignment of any of the @samp{.text}
3732 input sections.
3733
3734 The @var{address} may be an arbitrary expression; @ref{Expressions}.
3735 For example, if you want to align the section on a 0x10 byte boundary,
3736 so that the lowest four bits of the section address are zero, you could
3737 do something like this:
3738 @smallexample
3739 .text ALIGN(0x10) : @{ *(.text) @}
3740 @end smallexample
3741 @noindent
3742 This works because @code{ALIGN} returns the current location counter
3743 aligned upward to the specified value.
3744
3745 Specifying @var{address} for a section will change the value of the
3746 location counter, provided that the section is non-empty. (Empty
3747 sections are ignored).
3748
3749 @node Input Section
3750 @subsection Input Section Description
3751 @cindex input sections
3752 @cindex mapping input sections to output sections
3753 The most common output section command is an input section description.
3754
3755 The input section description is the most basic linker script operation.
3756 You use output sections to tell the linker how to lay out your program
3757 in memory. You use input section descriptions to tell the linker how to
3758 map the input files into your memory layout.
3759
3760 @menu
3761 * Input Section Basics:: Input section basics
3762 * Input Section Wildcards:: Input section wildcard patterns
3763 * Input Section Common:: Input section for common symbols
3764 * Input Section Keep:: Input section and garbage collection
3765 * Input Section Example:: Input section example
3766 @end menu
3767
3768 @node Input Section Basics
3769 @subsubsection Input Section Basics
3770 @cindex input section basics
3771 An input section description consists of a file name optionally followed
3772 by a list of section names in parentheses.
3773
3774 The file name and the section name may be wildcard patterns, which we
3775 describe further below (@pxref{Input Section Wildcards}).
3776
3777 The most common input section description is to include all input
3778 sections with a particular name in the output section. For example, to
3779 include all input @samp{.text} sections, you would write:
3780 @smallexample
3781 *(.text)
3782 @end smallexample
3783 @noindent
3784 Here the @samp{*} is a wildcard which matches any file name. To exclude a list
3785 of files from matching the file name wildcard, EXCLUDE_FILE may be used to
3786 match all files except the ones specified in the EXCLUDE_FILE list. For
3787 example:
3788 @smallexample
3789 *(EXCLUDE_FILE (*crtend.o *otherfile.o) .ctors)
3790 @end smallexample
3791 will cause all .ctors sections from all files except @file{crtend.o} and
3792 @file{otherfile.o} to be included.
3793
3794 There are two ways to include more than one section:
3795 @smallexample
3796 *(.text .rdata)
3797 *(.text) *(.rdata)
3798 @end smallexample
3799 @noindent
3800 The difference between these is the order in which the @samp{.text} and
3801 @samp{.rdata} input sections will appear in the output section. In the
3802 first example, they will be intermingled, appearing in the same order as
3803 they are found in the linker input. In the second example, all
3804 @samp{.text} input sections will appear first, followed by all
3805 @samp{.rdata} input sections.
3806
3807 You can specify a file name to include sections from a particular file.
3808 You would do this if one or more of your files contain special data that
3809 needs to be at a particular location in memory. For example:
3810 @smallexample
3811 data.o(.data)
3812 @end smallexample
3813
3814 You can also specify files within archives by writing a pattern
3815 matching the archive, a colon, then the pattern matching the file,
3816 with no whitespace around the colon.
3817
3818 @table @samp
3819 @item archive:file
3820 matches file within archive
3821 @item archive:
3822 matches the whole archive
3823 @item :file
3824 matches file but not one in an archive
3825 @end table
3826
3827 Either one or both of @samp{archive} and @samp{file} can contain shell
3828 wildcards. On DOS based file systems, the linker will assume that a
3829 single letter followed by a colon is a drive specifier, so
3830 @samp{c:myfile.o} is a simple file specification, not @samp{myfile.o}
3831 within an archive called @samp{c}. @samp{archive:file} filespecs may
3832 also be used within an @code{EXCLUDE_FILE} list, but may not appear in
3833 other linker script contexts. For instance, you cannot extract a file
3834 from an archive by using @samp{archive:file} in an @code{INPUT}
3835 command.
3836
3837 If you use a file name without a list of sections, then all sections in
3838 the input file will be included in the output section. This is not
3839 commonly done, but it may by useful on occasion. For example:
3840 @smallexample
3841 data.o
3842 @end smallexample
3843
3844 When you use a file name which is not an @samp{archive:file} specifier
3845 and does not contain any wild card
3846 characters, the linker will first see if you also specified the file
3847 name on the linker command line or in an @code{INPUT} command. If you
3848 did not, the linker will attempt to open the file as an input file, as
3849 though it appeared on the command line. Note that this differs from an
3850 @code{INPUT} command, because the linker will not search for the file in
3851 the archive search path.
3852
3853 @node Input Section Wildcards
3854 @subsubsection Input Section Wildcard Patterns
3855 @cindex input section wildcards
3856 @cindex wildcard file name patterns
3857 @cindex file name wildcard patterns
3858 @cindex section name wildcard patterns
3859 In an input section description, either the file name or the section
3860 name or both may be wildcard patterns.
3861
3862 The file name of @samp{*} seen in many examples is a simple wildcard
3863 pattern for the file name.
3864
3865 The wildcard patterns are like those used by the Unix shell.
3866
3867 @table @samp
3868 @item *
3869 matches any number of characters
3870 @item ?
3871 matches any single character
3872 @item [@var{chars}]
3873 matches a single instance of any of the @var{chars}; the @samp{-}
3874 character may be used to specify a range of characters, as in
3875 @samp{[a-z]} to match any lower case letter
3876 @item \
3877 quotes the following character
3878 @end table
3879
3880 When a file name is matched with a wildcard, the wildcard characters
3881 will not match a @samp{/} character (used to separate directory names on
3882 Unix). A pattern consisting of a single @samp{*} character is an
3883 exception; it will always match any file name, whether it contains a
3884 @samp{/} or not. In a section name, the wildcard characters will match
3885 a @samp{/} character.
3886
3887 File name wildcard patterns only match files which are explicitly
3888 specified on the command line or in an @code{INPUT} command. The linker
3889 does not search directories to expand wildcards.
3890
3891 If a file name matches more than one wildcard pattern, or if a file name
3892 appears explicitly and is also matched by a wildcard pattern, the linker
3893 will use the first match in the linker script. For example, this
3894 sequence of input section descriptions is probably in error, because the
3895 @file{data.o} rule will not be used:
3896 @smallexample
3897 .data : @{ *(.data) @}
3898 .data1 : @{ data.o(.data) @}
3899 @end smallexample
3900
3901 @cindex SORT_BY_NAME
3902 Normally, the linker will place files and sections matched by wildcards
3903 in the order in which they are seen during the link. You can change
3904 this by using the @code{SORT_BY_NAME} keyword, which appears before a wildcard
3905 pattern in parentheses (e.g., @code{SORT_BY_NAME(.text*)}). When the
3906 @code{SORT_BY_NAME} keyword is used, the linker will sort the files or sections
3907 into ascending order by name before placing them in the output file.
3908
3909 @cindex SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT
3910 @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} is very similar to @code{SORT_BY_NAME}. The
3911 difference is @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} will sort sections into
3912 ascending order by alignment before placing them in the output file.
3913
3914 @cindex SORT_BY_INIT_PRIORITY
3915 @code{SORT_BY_INIT_PRIORITY} is very similar to @code{SORT_BY_NAME}. The
3916 difference is @code{SORT_BY_INIT_PRIORITY} will sort sections into
3917 ascending order by numerical value of the GCC init_priority attribute
3918 encoded in the section name before placing them in the output file.
3919
3920 @cindex SORT
3921 @code{SORT} is an alias for @code{SORT_BY_NAME}.
3922
3923 When there are nested section sorting commands in linker script, there
3924 can be at most 1 level of nesting for section sorting commands.
3925
3926 @enumerate
3927 @item
3928 @code{SORT_BY_NAME} (@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern)).
3929 It will sort the input sections by name first, then by alignment if 2
3930 sections have the same name.
3931 @item
3932 @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern)).
3933 It will sort the input sections by alignment first, then by name if 2
3934 sections have the same alignment.
3935 @item
3936 @code{SORT_BY_NAME} (@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern)) is
3937 treated the same as @code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern).
3938 @item
3939 @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern))
3940 is treated the same as @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern).
3941 @item
3942 All other nested section sorting commands are invalid.
3943 @end enumerate
3944
3945 When both command line section sorting option and linker script
3946 section sorting command are used, section sorting command always
3947 takes precedence over the command line option.
3948
3949 If the section sorting command in linker script isn't nested, the
3950 command line option will make the section sorting command to be
3951 treated as nested sorting command.
3952
3953 @enumerate
3954 @item
3955 @code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern ) with
3956 @option{--sort-sections alignment} is equivalent to
3957 @code{SORT_BY_NAME} (@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern)).
3958 @item
3959 @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern) with
3960 @option{--sort-section name} is equivalent to
3961 @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern)).
3962 @end enumerate
3963
3964 If the section sorting command in linker script is nested, the
3965 command line option will be ignored.
3966
3967 If you ever get confused about where input sections are going, use the
3968 @samp{-M} linker option to generate a map file. The map file shows
3969 precisely how input sections are mapped to output sections.
3970
3971 This example shows how wildcard patterns might be used to partition
3972 files. This linker script directs the linker to place all @samp{.text}
3973 sections in @samp{.text} and all @samp{.bss} sections in @samp{.bss}.
3974 The linker will place the @samp{.data} section from all files beginning
3975 with an upper case character in @samp{.DATA}; for all other files, the
3976 linker will place the @samp{.data} section in @samp{.data}.
3977 @smallexample
3978 @group
3979 SECTIONS @{
3980 .text : @{ *(.text) @}
3981 .DATA : @{ [A-Z]*(.data) @}
3982 .data : @{ *(.data) @}
3983 .bss : @{ *(.bss) @}
3984 @}
3985 @end group
3986 @end smallexample
3987
3988 @node Input Section Common
3989 @subsubsection Input Section for Common Symbols
3990 @cindex common symbol placement
3991 @cindex uninitialized data placement
3992 A special notation is needed for common symbols, because in many object
3993 file formats common symbols do not have a particular input section. The
3994 linker treats common symbols as though they are in an input section
3995 named @samp{COMMON}.
3996
3997 You may use file names with the @samp{COMMON} section just as with any
3998 other input sections. You can use this to place common symbols from a
3999 particular input file in one section while common symbols from other
4000 input files are placed in another section.
4001
4002 In most cases, common symbols in input files will be placed in the
4003 @samp{.bss} section in the output file. For example:
4004 @smallexample
4005 .bss @{ *(.bss) *(COMMON) @}
4006 @end smallexample
4007
4008 @cindex scommon section
4009 @cindex small common symbols
4010 Some object file formats have more than one type of common symbol. For
4011 example, the MIPS ELF object file format distinguishes standard common
4012 symbols and small common symbols. In this case, the linker will use a
4013 different special section name for other types of common symbols. In
4014 the case of MIPS ELF, the linker uses @samp{COMMON} for standard common
4015 symbols and @samp{.scommon} for small common symbols. This permits you
4016 to map the different types of common symbols into memory at different
4017 locations.
4018
4019 @cindex [COMMON]
4020 You will sometimes see @samp{[COMMON]} in old linker scripts. This
4021 notation is now considered obsolete. It is equivalent to
4022 @samp{*(COMMON)}.
4023
4024 @node Input Section Keep
4025 @subsubsection Input Section and Garbage Collection
4026 @cindex KEEP
4027 @cindex garbage collection
4028 When link-time garbage collection is in use (@samp{--gc-sections}),
4029 it is often useful to mark sections that should not be eliminated.
4030 This is accomplished by surrounding an input section's wildcard entry
4031 with @code{KEEP()}, as in @code{KEEP(*(.init))} or
4032 @code{KEEP(SORT_BY_NAME(*)(.ctors))}.
4033
4034 @node Input Section Example
4035 @subsubsection Input Section Example
4036 The following example is a complete linker script. It tells the linker
4037 to read all of the sections from file @file{all.o} and place them at the
4038 start of output section @samp{outputa} which starts at location
4039 @samp{0x10000}. All of section @samp{.input1} from file @file{foo.o}
4040 follows immediately, in the same output section. All of section
4041 @samp{.input2} from @file{foo.o} goes into output section
4042 @samp{outputb}, followed by section @samp{.input1} from @file{foo1.o}.
4043 All of the remaining @samp{.input1} and @samp{.input2} sections from any
4044 files are written to output section @samp{outputc}.
4045
4046 @smallexample
4047 @group
4048 SECTIONS @{
4049 outputa 0x10000 :
4050 @{
4051 all.o
4052 foo.o (.input1)
4053 @}
4054 @end group
4055 @group
4056 outputb :
4057 @{
4058 foo.o (.input2)
4059 foo1.o (.input1)
4060 @}
4061 @end group
4062 @group
4063 outputc :
4064 @{
4065 *(.input1)
4066 *(.input2)
4067 @}
4068 @}
4069 @end group
4070 @end smallexample
4071
4072 @node Output Section Data
4073 @subsection Output Section Data
4074 @cindex data
4075 @cindex section data
4076 @cindex output section data
4077 @kindex BYTE(@var{expression})
4078 @kindex SHORT(@var{expression})
4079 @kindex LONG(@var{expression})
4080 @kindex QUAD(@var{expression})
4081 @kindex SQUAD(@var{expression})
4082 You can include explicit bytes of data in an output section by using
4083 @code{BYTE}, @code{SHORT}, @code{LONG}, @code{QUAD}, or @code{SQUAD} as
4084 an output section command. Each keyword is followed by an expression in
4085 parentheses providing the value to store (@pxref{Expressions}). The
4086 value of the expression is stored at the current value of the location
4087 counter.
4088
4089 The @code{BYTE}, @code{SHORT}, @code{LONG}, and @code{QUAD} commands
4090 store one, two, four, and eight bytes (respectively). After storing the
4091 bytes, the location counter is incremented by the number of bytes
4092 stored.
4093
4094 For example, this will store the byte 1 followed by the four byte value
4095 of the symbol @samp{addr}:
4096 @smallexample
4097 BYTE(1)
4098 LONG(addr)
4099 @end smallexample
4100
4101 When using a 64 bit host or target, @code{QUAD} and @code{SQUAD} are the
4102 same; they both store an 8 byte, or 64 bit, value. When both host and
4103 target are 32 bits, an expression is computed as 32 bits. In this case
4104 @code{QUAD} stores a 32 bit value zero extended to 64 bits, and
4105 @code{SQUAD} stores a 32 bit value sign extended to 64 bits.
4106
4107 If the object file format of the output file has an explicit endianness,
4108 which is the normal case, the value will be stored in that endianness.
4109 When the object file format does not have an explicit endianness, as is
4110 true of, for example, S-records, the value will be stored in the
4111 endianness of the first input object file.
4112
4113 Note---these commands only work inside a section description and not
4114 between them, so the following will produce an error from the linker:
4115 @smallexample
4116 SECTIONS @{@ .text : @{@ *(.text) @}@ LONG(1) .data : @{@ *(.data) @}@ @}@
4117 @end smallexample
4118 whereas this will work:
4119 @smallexample
4120 SECTIONS @{@ .text : @{@ *(.text) ; LONG(1) @}@ .data : @{@ *(.data) @}@ @}@
4121 @end smallexample
4122
4123 @kindex FILL(@var{expression})
4124 @cindex holes, filling
4125 @cindex unspecified memory
4126 You may use the @code{FILL} command to set the fill pattern for the
4127 current section. It is followed by an expression in parentheses. Any
4128 otherwise unspecified regions of memory within the section (for example,
4129 gaps left due to the required alignment of input sections) are filled
4130 with the value of the expression, repeated as
4131 necessary. A @code{FILL} statement covers memory locations after the
4132 point at which it occurs in the section definition; by including more
4133 than one @code{FILL} statement, you can have different fill patterns in
4134 different parts of an output section.
4135
4136 This example shows how to fill unspecified regions of memory with the
4137 value @samp{0x90}:
4138 @smallexample
4139 FILL(0x90909090)
4140 @end smallexample
4141
4142 The @code{FILL} command is similar to the @samp{=@var{fillexp}} output
4143 section attribute, but it only affects the
4144 part of the section following the @code{FILL} command, rather than the
4145 entire section. If both are used, the @code{FILL} command takes
4146 precedence. @xref{Output Section Fill}, for details on the fill
4147 expression.
4148
4149 @node Output Section Keywords
4150 @subsection Output Section Keywords
4151 There are a couple of keywords which can appear as output section
4152 commands.
4153
4154 @table @code
4155 @kindex CREATE_OBJECT_SYMBOLS
4156 @cindex input filename symbols
4157 @cindex filename symbols
4158 @item CREATE_OBJECT_SYMBOLS
4159 The command tells the linker to create a symbol for each input file.
4160 The name of each symbol will be the name of the corresponding input
4161 file. The section of each symbol will be the output section in which
4162 the @code{CREATE_OBJECT_SYMBOLS} command appears.
4163
4164 This is conventional for the a.out object file format. It is not
4165 normally used for any other object file format.
4166
4167 @kindex CONSTRUCTORS
4168 @cindex C++ constructors, arranging in link
4169 @cindex constructors, arranging in link
4170 @item CONSTRUCTORS
4171 When linking using the a.out object file format, the linker uses an
4172 unusual set construct to support C++ global constructors and
4173 destructors. When linking object file formats which do not support
4174 arbitrary sections, such as ECOFF and XCOFF, the linker will
4175 automatically recognize C++ global constructors and destructors by name.
4176 For these object file formats, the @code{CONSTRUCTORS} command tells the
4177 linker to place constructor information in the output section where the
4178 @code{CONSTRUCTORS} command appears. The @code{CONSTRUCTORS} command is
4179 ignored for other object file formats.
4180
4181 The symbol @w{@code{__CTOR_LIST__}} marks the start of the global
4182 constructors, and the symbol @w{@code{__CTOR_END__}} marks the end.
4183 Similarly, @w{@code{__DTOR_LIST__}} and @w{@code{__DTOR_END__}} mark
4184 the start and end of the global destructors. The
4185 first word in the list is the number of entries, followed by the address
4186 of each constructor or destructor, followed by a zero word. The
4187 compiler must arrange to actually run the code. For these object file
4188 formats @sc{gnu} C++ normally calls constructors from a subroutine
4189 @code{__main}; a call to @code{__main} is automatically inserted into
4190 the startup code for @code{main}. @sc{gnu} C++ normally runs
4191 destructors either by using @code{atexit}, or directly from the function
4192 @code{exit}.
4193
4194 For object file formats such as @code{COFF} or @code{ELF} which support
4195 arbitrary section names, @sc{gnu} C++ will normally arrange to put the
4196 addresses of global constructors and destructors into the @code{.ctors}
4197 and @code{.dtors} sections. Placing the following sequence into your
4198 linker script will build the sort of table which the @sc{gnu} C++
4199 runtime code expects to see.
4200
4201 @smallexample
4202 __CTOR_LIST__ = .;
4203 LONG((__CTOR_END__ - __CTOR_LIST__) / 4 - 2)
4204 *(.ctors)
4205 LONG(0)
4206 __CTOR_END__ = .;
4207 __DTOR_LIST__ = .;
4208 LONG((__DTOR_END__ - __DTOR_LIST__) / 4 - 2)
4209 *(.dtors)
4210 LONG(0)
4211 __DTOR_END__ = .;
4212 @end smallexample
4213
4214 If you are using the @sc{gnu} C++ support for initialization priority,
4215 which provides some control over the order in which global constructors
4216 are run, you must sort the constructors at link time to ensure that they
4217 are executed in the correct order. When using the @code{CONSTRUCTORS}
4218 command, use @samp{SORT_BY_NAME(CONSTRUCTORS)} instead. When using the
4219 @code{.ctors} and @code{.dtors} sections, use @samp{*(SORT_BY_NAME(.ctors))} and
4220 @samp{*(SORT_BY_NAME(.dtors))} instead of just @samp{*(.ctors)} and
4221 @samp{*(.dtors)}.
4222
4223 Normally the compiler and linker will handle these issues automatically,
4224 and you will not need to concern yourself with them. However, you may
4225 need to consider this if you are using C++ and writing your own linker
4226 scripts.
4227
4228 @end table
4229
4230 @node Output Section Discarding
4231 @subsection Output Section Discarding
4232 @cindex discarding sections
4233 @cindex sections, discarding
4234 @cindex removing sections
4235 The linker will not create output sections with no contents. This is
4236 for convenience when referring to input sections that may or may not
4237 be present in any of the input files. For example:
4238 @smallexample
4239 .foo : @{ *(.foo) @}
4240 @end smallexample
4241 @noindent
4242 will only create a @samp{.foo} section in the output file if there is a
4243 @samp{.foo} section in at least one input file, and if the input
4244 sections are not all empty. Other link script directives that allocate
4245 space in an output section will also create the output section.
4246
4247 The linker will ignore address assignments (@pxref{Output Section Address})
4248 on discarded output sections, except when the linker script defines
4249 symbols in the output section. In that case the linker will obey
4250 the address assignments, possibly advancing dot even though the
4251 section is discarded.
4252
4253 @cindex /DISCARD/
4254 The special output section name @samp{/DISCARD/} may be used to discard
4255 input sections. Any input sections which are assigned to an output
4256 section named @samp{/DISCARD/} are not included in the output file.
4257
4258 @node Output Section Attributes
4259 @subsection Output Section Attributes
4260 @cindex output section attributes
4261 We showed above that the full description of an output section looked
4262 like this:
4263
4264 @smallexample
4265 @group
4266 @var{section} [@var{address}] [(@var{type})] :
4267 [AT(@var{lma})]
4268 [ALIGN(@var{section_align})]
4269 [SUBALIGN(@var{subsection_align})]
4270 [@var{constraint}]
4271 @{
4272 @var{output-section-command}
4273 @var{output-section-command}
4274 @dots{}
4275 @} [>@var{region}] [AT>@var{lma_region}] [:@var{phdr} :@var{phdr} @dots{}] [=@var{fillexp}]
4276 @end group
4277 @end smallexample
4278
4279 We've already described @var{section}, @var{address}, and
4280 @var{output-section-command}. In this section we will describe the
4281 remaining section attributes.
4282
4283 @menu
4284 * Output Section Type:: Output section type
4285 * Output Section LMA:: Output section LMA
4286 * Forced Output Alignment:: Forced Output Alignment
4287 * Forced Input Alignment:: Forced Input Alignment
4288 * Output Section Constraint:: Output section constraint
4289 * Output Section Region:: Output section region
4290 * Output Section Phdr:: Output section phdr
4291 * Output Section Fill:: Output section fill
4292 @end menu
4293
4294 @node Output Section Type
4295 @subsubsection Output Section Type
4296 Each output section may have a type. The type is a keyword in
4297 parentheses. The following types are defined:
4298
4299 @table @code
4300 @item NOLOAD
4301 The section should be marked as not loadable, so that it will not be
4302 loaded into memory when the program is run.
4303 @item DSECT
4304 @itemx COPY
4305 @itemx INFO
4306 @itemx OVERLAY
4307 These type names are supported for backward compatibility, and are
4308 rarely used. They all have the same effect: the section should be
4309 marked as not allocatable, so that no memory is allocated for the
4310 section when the program is run.
4311 @end table
4312
4313 @kindex NOLOAD
4314 @cindex prevent unnecessary loading
4315 @cindex loading, preventing
4316 The linker normally sets the attributes of an output section based on
4317 the input sections which map into it. You can override this by using
4318 the section type. For example, in the script sample below, the
4319 @samp{ROM} section is addressed at memory location @samp{0} and does not
4320 need to be loaded when the program is run.
4321 @smallexample
4322 @group
4323 SECTIONS @{
4324 ROM 0 (NOLOAD) : @{ @dots{} @}
4325 @dots{}
4326 @}
4327 @end group
4328 @end smallexample
4329
4330 @node Output Section LMA
4331 @subsubsection Output Section LMA
4332 @kindex AT>@var{lma_region}
4333 @kindex AT(@var{lma})
4334 @cindex load address
4335 @cindex section load address
4336 Every section has a virtual address (VMA) and a load address (LMA); see
4337 @ref{Basic Script Concepts}. The virtual address is specified by the
4338 @pxref{Output Section Address} described earlier. The load address is
4339 specified by the @code{AT} or @code{AT>} keywords. Specifying a load
4340 address is optional.
4341
4342 The @code{AT} keyword takes an expression as an argument. This
4343 specifies the exact load address of the section. The @code{AT>} keyword
4344 takes the name of a memory region as an argument. @xref{MEMORY}. The
4345 load address of the section is set to the next free address in the
4346 region, aligned to the section's alignment requirements.
4347
4348 If neither @code{AT} nor @code{AT>} is specified for an allocatable
4349 section, the linker will use the following heuristic to determine the
4350 load address:
4351
4352 @itemize @bullet
4353 @item
4354 If the section has a specific VMA address, then this is used as
4355 the LMA address as well.
4356
4357 @item
4358 If the section is not allocatable then its LMA is set to its VMA.
4359
4360 @item
4361 Otherwise if a memory region can be found that is compatible
4362 with the current section, and this region contains at least one
4363 section, then the LMA is set so the difference between the
4364 VMA and LMA is the same as the difference between the VMA and LMA of
4365 the last section in the located region.
4366
4367 @item
4368 If no memory regions have been declared then a default region
4369 that covers the entire address space is used in the previous step.
4370
4371 @item
4372 If no suitable region could be found, or there was no previous
4373 section then the LMA is set equal to the VMA.
4374 @end itemize
4375
4376 @cindex ROM initialized data
4377 @cindex initialized data in ROM
4378 This feature is designed to make it easy to build a ROM image. For
4379 example, the following linker script creates three output sections: one
4380 called @samp{.text}, which starts at @code{0x1000}, one called
4381 @samp{.mdata}, which is loaded at the end of the @samp{.text} section
4382 even though its VMA is @code{0x2000}, and one called @samp{.bss} to hold
4383 uninitialized data at address @code{0x3000}. The symbol @code{_data} is
4384 defined with the value @code{0x2000}, which shows that the location
4385 counter holds the VMA value, not the LMA value.
4386
4387 @smallexample
4388 @group
4389 SECTIONS
4390 @{
4391 .text 0x1000 : @{ *(.text) _etext = . ; @}
4392 .mdata 0x2000 :
4393 AT ( ADDR (.text) + SIZEOF (.text) )
4394 @{ _data = . ; *(.data); _edata = . ; @}
4395 .bss 0x3000 :
4396 @{ _bstart = . ; *(.bss) *(COMMON) ; _bend = . ;@}
4397 @}
4398 @end group
4399 @end smallexample
4400
4401 The run-time initialization code for use with a program generated with
4402 this linker script would include something like the following, to copy
4403 the initialized data from the ROM image to its runtime address. Notice
4404 how this code takes advantage of the symbols defined by the linker
4405 script.
4406
4407 @smallexample
4408 @group
4409 extern char _etext, _data, _edata, _bstart, _bend;
4410 char *src = &_etext;
4411 char *dst = &_data;
4412
4413 /* ROM has data at end of text; copy it. */
4414 while (dst < &_edata)
4415 *dst++ = *src++;
4416
4417 /* Zero bss. */
4418 for (dst = &_bstart; dst< &_bend; dst++)
4419 *dst = 0;
4420 @end group
4421 @end smallexample
4422
4423 @node Forced Output Alignment
4424 @subsubsection Forced Output Alignment
4425 @kindex ALIGN(@var{section_align})
4426 @cindex forcing output section alignment
4427 @cindex output section alignment
4428 You can increase an output section's alignment by using ALIGN.
4429
4430 @node Forced Input Alignment
4431 @subsubsection Forced Input Alignment
4432 @kindex SUBALIGN(@var{subsection_align})
4433 @cindex forcing input section alignment
4434 @cindex input section alignment
4435 You can force input section alignment within an output section by using
4436 SUBALIGN. The value specified overrides any alignment given by input
4437 sections, whether larger or smaller.
4438
4439 @node Output Section Constraint
4440 @subsubsection Output Section Constraint
4441 @kindex ONLY_IF_RO
4442 @kindex ONLY_IF_RW
4443 @cindex constraints on output sections
4444 You can specify that an output section should only be created if all
4445 of its input sections are read-only or all of its input sections are
4446 read-write by using the keyword @code{ONLY_IF_RO} and
4447 @code{ONLY_IF_RW} respectively.
4448
4449 @node Output Section Region
4450 @subsubsection Output Section Region
4451 @kindex >@var{region}
4452 @cindex section, assigning to memory region
4453 @cindex memory regions and sections
4454 You can assign a section to a previously defined region of memory by
4455 using @samp{>@var{region}}. @xref{MEMORY}.
4456
4457 Here is a simple example:
4458 @smallexample
4459 @group
4460 MEMORY @{ rom : ORIGIN = 0x1000, LENGTH = 0x1000 @}
4461 SECTIONS @{ ROM : @{ *(.text) @} >rom @}
4462 @end group
4463 @end smallexample
4464
4465 @node Output Section Phdr
4466 @subsubsection Output Section Phdr
4467 @kindex :@var{phdr}
4468 @cindex section, assigning to program header
4469 @cindex program headers and sections
4470 You can assign a section to a previously defined program segment by
4471 using @samp{:@var{phdr}}. @xref{PHDRS}. If a section is assigned to
4472 one or more segments, then all subsequent allocated sections will be
4473 assigned to those segments as well, unless they use an explicitly
4474 @code{:@var{phdr}} modifier. You can use @code{:NONE} to tell the
4475 linker to not put the section in any segment at all.
4476
4477 Here is a simple example:
4478 @smallexample
4479 @group
4480 PHDRS @{ text PT_LOAD ; @}
4481 SECTIONS @{ .text : @{ *(.text) @} :text @}
4482 @end group
4483 @end smallexample
4484
4485 @node Output Section Fill
4486 @subsubsection Output Section Fill
4487 @kindex =@var{fillexp}
4488 @cindex section fill pattern
4489 @cindex fill pattern, entire section
4490 You can set the fill pattern for an entire section by using
4491 @samp{=@var{fillexp}}. @var{fillexp} is an expression
4492 (@pxref{Expressions}). Any otherwise unspecified regions of memory
4493 within the output section (for example, gaps left due to the required
4494 alignment of input sections) will be filled with the value, repeated as
4495 necessary. If the fill expression is a simple hex number, ie. a string
4496 of hex digit starting with @samp{0x} and without a trailing @samp{k} or @samp{M}, then
4497 an arbitrarily long sequence of hex digits can be used to specify the
4498 fill pattern; Leading zeros become part of the pattern too. For all
4499 other cases, including extra parentheses or a unary @code{+}, the fill
4500 pattern is the four least significant bytes of the value of the
4501 expression. In all cases, the number is big-endian.
4502
4503 You can also change the fill value with a @code{FILL} command in the
4504 output section commands; (@pxref{Output Section Data}).
4505
4506 Here is a simple example:
4507 @smallexample
4508 @group
4509 SECTIONS @{ .text : @{ *(.text) @} =0x90909090 @}
4510 @end group
4511 @end smallexample
4512
4513 @node Overlay Description
4514 @subsection Overlay Description
4515 @kindex OVERLAY
4516 @cindex overlays
4517 An overlay description provides an easy way to describe sections which
4518 are to be loaded as part of a single memory image but are to be run at
4519 the same memory address. At run time, some sort of overlay manager will
4520 copy the overlaid sections in and out of the runtime memory address as
4521 required, perhaps by simply manipulating addressing bits. This approach
4522 can be useful, for example, when a certain region of memory is faster
4523 than another.
4524
4525 Overlays are described using the @code{OVERLAY} command. The
4526 @code{OVERLAY} command is used within a @code{SECTIONS} command, like an
4527 output section description. The full syntax of the @code{OVERLAY}
4528 command is as follows:
4529 @smallexample
4530 @group
4531 OVERLAY [@var{start}] : [NOCROSSREFS] [AT ( @var{ldaddr} )]
4532 @{
4533 @var{secname1}
4534 @{
4535 @var{output-section-command}
4536 @var{output-section-command}
4537 @dots{}
4538 @} [:@var{phdr}@dots{}] [=@var{fill}]
4539 @var{secname2}
4540 @{
4541 @var{output-section-command}
4542 @var{output-section-command}
4543 @dots{}
4544 @} [:@var{phdr}@dots{}] [=@var{fill}]
4545 @dots{}
4546 @} [>@var{region}] [:@var{phdr}@dots{}] [=@var{fill}]
4547 @end group
4548 @end smallexample
4549
4550 Everything is optional except @code{OVERLAY} (a keyword), and each
4551 section must have a name (@var{secname1} and @var{secname2} above). The
4552 section definitions within the @code{OVERLAY} construct are identical to
4553 those within the general @code{SECTIONS} contruct (@pxref{SECTIONS}),
4554 except that no addresses and no memory regions may be defined for
4555 sections within an @code{OVERLAY}.
4556
4557 The sections are all defined with the same starting address. The load
4558 addresses of the sections are arranged such that they are consecutive in
4559 memory starting at the load address used for the @code{OVERLAY} as a
4560 whole (as with normal section definitions, the load address is optional,
4561 and defaults to the start address; the start address is also optional,
4562 and defaults to the current value of the location counter).
4563
4564 If the @code{NOCROSSREFS} keyword is used, and there any references
4565 among the sections, the linker will report an error. Since the sections
4566 all run at the same address, it normally does not make sense for one
4567 section to refer directly to another. @xref{Miscellaneous Commands,
4568 NOCROSSREFS}.
4569
4570 For each section within the @code{OVERLAY}, the linker automatically
4571 provides two symbols. The symbol @code{__load_start_@var{secname}} is
4572 defined as the starting load address of the section. The symbol
4573 @code{__load_stop_@var{secname}} is defined as the final load address of
4574 the section. Any characters within @var{secname} which are not legal
4575 within C identifiers are removed. C (or assembler) code may use these
4576 symbols to move the overlaid sections around as necessary.
4577
4578 At the end of the overlay, the value of the location counter is set to
4579 the start address of the overlay plus the size of the largest section.
4580
4581 Here is an example. Remember that this would appear inside a
4582 @code{SECTIONS} construct.
4583 @smallexample
4584 @group
4585 OVERLAY 0x1000 : AT (0x4000)
4586 @{
4587 .text0 @{ o1/*.o(.text) @}
4588 .text1 @{ o2/*.o(.text) @}
4589 @}
4590 @end group
4591 @end smallexample
4592 @noindent
4593 This will define both @samp{.text0} and @samp{.text1} to start at
4594 address 0x1000. @samp{.text0} will be loaded at address 0x4000, and
4595 @samp{.text1} will be loaded immediately after @samp{.text0}. The
4596 following symbols will be defined if referenced: @code{__load_start_text0},
4597 @code{__load_stop_text0}, @code{__load_start_text1},
4598 @code{__load_stop_text1}.
4599
4600 C code to copy overlay @code{.text1} into the overlay area might look
4601 like the following.
4602
4603 @smallexample
4604 @group
4605 extern char __load_start_text1, __load_stop_text1;
4606 memcpy ((char *) 0x1000, &__load_start_text1,
4607 &__load_stop_text1 - &__load_start_text1);
4608 @end group
4609 @end smallexample
4610
4611 Note that the @code{OVERLAY} command is just syntactic sugar, since
4612 everything it does can be done using the more basic commands. The above
4613 example could have been written identically as follows.
4614
4615 @smallexample
4616 @group
4617 .text0 0x1000 : AT (0x4000) @{ o1/*.o(.text) @}
4618 PROVIDE (__load_start_text0 = LOADADDR (.text0));
4619 PROVIDE (__load_stop_text0 = LOADADDR (.text0) + SIZEOF (.text0));
4620 .text1 0x1000 : AT (0x4000 + SIZEOF (.text0)) @{ o2/*.o(.text) @}
4621 PROVIDE (__load_start_text1 = LOADADDR (.text1));
4622 PROVIDE (__load_stop_text1 = LOADADDR (.text1) + SIZEOF (.text1));
4623 . = 0x1000 + MAX (SIZEOF (.text0), SIZEOF (.text1));
4624 @end group
4625 @end smallexample
4626
4627 @node MEMORY
4628 @section MEMORY Command
4629 @kindex MEMORY
4630 @cindex memory regions
4631 @cindex regions of memory
4632 @cindex allocating memory
4633 @cindex discontinuous memory
4634 The linker's default configuration permits allocation of all available
4635 memory. You can override this by using the @code{MEMORY} command.
4636
4637 The @code{MEMORY} command describes the location and size of blocks of
4638 memory in the target. You can use it to describe which memory regions
4639 may be used by the linker, and which memory regions it must avoid. You
4640 can then assign sections to particular memory regions. The linker will
4641 set section addresses based on the memory regions, and will warn about
4642 regions that become too full. The linker will not shuffle sections
4643 around to fit into the available regions.
4644
4645 A linker script may contain at most one use of the @code{MEMORY}
4646 command. However, you can define as many blocks of memory within it as
4647 you wish. The syntax is:
4648 @smallexample
4649 @group
4650 MEMORY
4651 @{
4652 @var{name} [(@var{attr})] : ORIGIN = @var{origin}, LENGTH = @var{len}
4653 @dots{}
4654 @}
4655 @end group
4656 @end smallexample
4657
4658 The @var{name} is a name used in the linker script to refer to the
4659 region. The region name has no meaning outside of the linker script.
4660 Region names are stored in a separate name space, and will not conflict
4661 with symbol names, file names, or section names. Each memory region
4662 must have a distinct name within the @code{MEMORY} command. However you can
4663 add later alias names to existing memory regions with the @ref{REGION_ALIAS}
4664 command.
4665
4666 @cindex memory region attributes
4667 The @var{attr} string is an optional list of attributes that specify
4668 whether to use a particular memory region for an input section which is
4669 not explicitly mapped in the linker script. As described in
4670 @ref{SECTIONS}, if you do not specify an output section for some input
4671 section, the linker will create an output section with the same name as
4672 the input section. If you define region attributes, the linker will use
4673 them to select the memory region for the output section that it creates.
4674
4675 The @var{attr} string must consist only of the following characters:
4676 @table @samp
4677 @item R
4678 Read-only section
4679 @item W
4680 Read/write section
4681 @item X
4682 Executable section
4683 @item A
4684 Allocatable section
4685 @item I
4686 Initialized section
4687 @item L
4688 Same as @samp{I}
4689 @item !
4690 Invert the sense of any of the attributes that follow
4691 @end table
4692
4693 If a unmapped section matches any of the listed attributes other than
4694 @samp{!}, it will be placed in the memory region. The @samp{!}
4695 attribute reverses this test, so that an unmapped section will be placed
4696 in the memory region only if it does not match any of the listed
4697 attributes.
4698
4699 @kindex ORIGIN =
4700 @kindex o =
4701 @kindex org =
4702 The @var{origin} is an numerical expression for the start address of
4703 the memory region. The expression must evaluate to a constant and it
4704 cannot involve any symbols. The keyword @code{ORIGIN} may be
4705 abbreviated to @code{org} or @code{o} (but not, for example,
4706 @code{ORG}).
4707
4708 @kindex LENGTH =
4709 @kindex len =
4710 @kindex l =
4711 The @var{len} is an expression for the size in bytes of the memory
4712 region. As with the @var{origin} expression, the expression must
4713 be numerical only and must evaluate to a constant. The keyword
4714 @code{LENGTH} may be abbreviated to @code{len} or @code{l}.
4715
4716 In the following example, we specify that there are two memory regions
4717 available for allocation: one starting at @samp{0} for 256 kilobytes,
4718 and the other starting at @samp{0x40000000} for four megabytes. The
4719 linker will place into the @samp{rom} memory region every section which
4720 is not explicitly mapped into a memory region, and is either read-only
4721 or executable. The linker will place other sections which are not
4722 explicitly mapped into a memory region into the @samp{ram} memory
4723 region.
4724
4725 @smallexample
4726 @group
4727 MEMORY
4728 @{
4729 rom (rx) : ORIGIN = 0, LENGTH = 256K
4730 ram (!rx) : org = 0x40000000, l = 4M
4731 @}
4732 @end group
4733 @end smallexample
4734
4735 Once you define a memory region, you can direct the linker to place
4736 specific output sections into that memory region by using the
4737 @samp{>@var{region}} output section attribute. For example, if you have
4738 a memory region named @samp{mem}, you would use @samp{>mem} in the
4739 output section definition. @xref{Output Section Region}. If no address
4740 was specified for the output section, the linker will set the address to
4741 the next available address within the memory region. If the combined
4742 output sections directed to a memory region are too large for the
4743 region, the linker will issue an error message.
4744
4745 It is possible to access the origin and length of a memory in an
4746 expression via the @code{ORIGIN(@var{memory})} and
4747 @code{LENGTH(@var{memory})} functions:
4748
4749 @smallexample
4750 @group
4751 _fstack = ORIGIN(ram) + LENGTH(ram) - 4;
4752 @end group
4753 @end smallexample
4754
4755 @node PHDRS
4756 @section PHDRS Command
4757 @kindex PHDRS
4758 @cindex program headers
4759 @cindex ELF program headers
4760 @cindex program segments
4761 @cindex segments, ELF
4762 The ELF object file format uses @dfn{program headers}, also knows as
4763 @dfn{segments}. The program headers describe how the program should be
4764 loaded into memory. You can print them out by using the @code{objdump}
4765 program with the @samp{-p} option.
4766
4767 When you run an ELF program on a native ELF system, the system loader
4768 reads the program headers in order to figure out how to load the
4769 program. This will only work if the program headers are set correctly.
4770 This manual does not describe the details of how the system loader
4771 interprets program headers; for more information, see the ELF ABI.
4772
4773 The linker will create reasonable program headers by default. However,
4774 in some cases, you may need to specify the program headers more
4775 precisely. You may use the @code{PHDRS} command for this purpose. When
4776 the linker sees the @code{PHDRS} command in the linker script, it will
4777 not create any program headers other than the ones specified.
4778
4779 The linker only pays attention to the @code{PHDRS} command when
4780 generating an ELF output file. In other cases, the linker will simply
4781 ignore @code{PHDRS}.
4782
4783 This is the syntax of the @code{PHDRS} command. The words @code{PHDRS},
4784 @code{FILEHDR}, @code{AT}, and @code{FLAGS} are keywords.
4785
4786 @smallexample
4787 @group
4788 PHDRS
4789 @{
4790 @var{name} @var{type} [ FILEHDR ] [ PHDRS ] [ AT ( @var{address} ) ]
4791 [ FLAGS ( @var{flags} ) ] ;
4792 @}
4793 @end group
4794 @end smallexample
4795
4796 The @var{name} is used only for reference in the @code{SECTIONS} command
4797 of the linker script. It is not put into the output file. Program
4798 header names are stored in a separate name space, and will not conflict
4799 with symbol names, file names, or section names. Each program header
4800 must have a distinct name. The headers are processed in order and it
4801 is usual for them to map to sections in ascending load address order.
4802
4803 Certain program header types describe segments of memory which the
4804 system loader will load from the file. In the linker script, you
4805 specify the contents of these segments by placing allocatable output
4806 sections in the segments. You use the @samp{:@var{phdr}} output section
4807 attribute to place a section in a particular segment. @xref{Output
4808 Section Phdr}.
4809
4810 It is normal to put certain sections in more than one segment. This
4811 merely implies that one segment of memory contains another. You may
4812 repeat @samp{:@var{phdr}}, using it once for each segment which should
4813 contain the section.
4814
4815 If you place a section in one or more segments using @samp{:@var{phdr}},
4816 then the linker will place all subsequent allocatable sections which do
4817 not specify @samp{:@var{phdr}} in the same segments. This is for
4818 convenience, since generally a whole set of contiguous sections will be
4819 placed in a single segment. You can use @code{:NONE} to override the
4820 default segment and tell the linker to not put the section in any
4821 segment at all.
4822
4823 @kindex FILEHDR
4824 @kindex PHDRS
4825 You may use the @code{FILEHDR} and @code{PHDRS} keywords after
4826 the program header type to further describe the contents of the segment.
4827 The @code{FILEHDR} keyword means that the segment should include the ELF
4828 file header. The @code{PHDRS} keyword means that the segment should
4829 include the ELF program headers themselves. If applied to a loadable
4830 segment (@code{PT_LOAD}), all prior loadable segments must have one of
4831 these keywords.
4832
4833 The @var{type} may be one of the following. The numbers indicate the
4834 value of the keyword.
4835
4836 @table @asis
4837 @item @code{PT_NULL} (0)
4838 Indicates an unused program header.
4839
4840 @item @code{PT_LOAD} (1)
4841 Indicates that this program header describes a segment to be loaded from
4842 the file.
4843
4844 @item @code{PT_DYNAMIC} (2)
4845 Indicates a segment where dynamic linking information can be found.
4846
4847 @item @code{PT_INTERP} (3)
4848 Indicates a segment where the name of the program interpreter may be
4849 found.
4850
4851 @item @code{PT_NOTE} (4)
4852 Indicates a segment holding note information.
4853
4854 @item @code{PT_SHLIB} (5)
4855 A reserved program header type, defined but not specified by the ELF
4856 ABI.
4857
4858 @item @code{PT_PHDR} (6)
4859 Indicates a segment where the program headers may be found.
4860
4861 @item @var{expression}
4862 An expression giving the numeric type of the program header. This may
4863 be used for types not defined above.
4864 @end table
4865
4866 You can specify that a segment should be loaded at a particular address
4867 in memory by using an @code{AT} expression. This is identical to the
4868 @code{AT} command used as an output section attribute (@pxref{Output
4869 Section LMA}). The @code{AT} command for a program header overrides the
4870 output section attribute.
4871
4872 The linker will normally set the segment flags based on the sections
4873 which comprise the segment. You may use the @code{FLAGS} keyword to
4874 explicitly specify the segment flags. The value of @var{flags} must be
4875 an integer. It is used to set the @code{p_flags} field of the program
4876 header.
4877
4878 Here is an example of @code{PHDRS}. This shows a typical set of program
4879 headers used on a native ELF system.
4880
4881 @example
4882 @group
4883 PHDRS
4884 @{
4885 headers PT_PHDR PHDRS ;
4886 interp PT_INTERP ;
4887 text PT_LOAD FILEHDR PHDRS ;
4888 data PT_LOAD ;
4889 dynamic PT_DYNAMIC ;
4890 @}
4891
4892 SECTIONS
4893 @{
4894 . = SIZEOF_HEADERS;
4895 .interp : @{ *(.interp) @} :text :interp
4896 .text : @{ *(.text) @} :text
4897 .rodata : @{ *(.rodata) @} /* defaults to :text */
4898 @dots{}
4899 . = . + 0x1000; /* move to a new page in memory */
4900 .data : @{ *(.data) @} :data
4901 .dynamic : @{ *(.dynamic) @} :data :dynamic
4902 @dots{}
4903 @}
4904 @end group
4905 @end example
4906
4907 @node VERSION
4908 @section VERSION Command
4909 @kindex VERSION @{script text@}
4910 @cindex symbol versions
4911 @cindex version script
4912 @cindex versions of symbols
4913 The linker supports symbol versions when using ELF. Symbol versions are
4914 only useful when using shared libraries. The dynamic linker can use
4915 symbol versions to select a specific version of a function when it runs
4916 a program that may have been linked against an earlier version of the
4917 shared library.
4918
4919 You can include a version script directly in the main linker script, or
4920 you can supply the version script as an implicit linker script. You can
4921 also use the @samp{--version-script} linker option.
4922
4923 The syntax of the @code{VERSION} command is simply
4924 @smallexample
4925 VERSION @{ version-script-commands @}
4926 @end smallexample
4927
4928 The format of the version script commands is identical to that used by
4929 Sun's linker in Solaris 2.5. The version script defines a tree of
4930 version nodes. You specify the node names and interdependencies in the
4931 version script. You can specify which symbols are bound to which
4932 version nodes, and you can reduce a specified set of symbols to local
4933 scope so that they are not globally visible outside of the shared
4934 library.
4935
4936 The easiest way to demonstrate the version script language is with a few
4937 examples.
4938
4939 @smallexample
4940 VERS_1.1 @{
4941 global:
4942 foo1;
4943 local:
4944 old*;
4945 original*;
4946 new*;
4947 @};
4948
4949 VERS_1.2 @{
4950 foo2;
4951 @} VERS_1.1;
4952
4953 VERS_2.0 @{
4954 bar1; bar2;
4955 extern "C++" @{
4956 ns::*;
4957 "f(int, double)";
4958 @};
4959 @} VERS_1.2;
4960 @end smallexample
4961
4962 This example version script defines three version nodes. The first
4963 version node defined is @samp{VERS_1.1}; it has no other dependencies.
4964 The script binds the symbol @samp{foo1} to @samp{VERS_1.1}. It reduces
4965 a number of symbols to local scope so that they are not visible outside
4966 of the shared library; this is done using wildcard patterns, so that any
4967 symbol whose name begins with @samp{old}, @samp{original}, or @samp{new}
4968 is matched. The wildcard patterns available are the same as those used
4969 in the shell when matching filenames (also known as ``globbing'').
4970 However, if you specify the symbol name inside double quotes, then the
4971 name is treated as literal, rather than as a glob pattern.
4972
4973 Next, the version script defines node @samp{VERS_1.2}. This node
4974 depends upon @samp{VERS_1.1}. The script binds the symbol @samp{foo2}
4975 to the version node @samp{VERS_1.2}.
4976
4977 Finally, the version script defines node @samp{VERS_2.0}. This node
4978 depends upon @samp{VERS_1.2}. The scripts binds the symbols @samp{bar1}
4979 and @samp{bar2} are bound to the version node @samp{VERS_2.0}.
4980
4981 When the linker finds a symbol defined in a library which is not
4982 specifically bound to a version node, it will effectively bind it to an
4983 unspecified base version of the library. You can bind all otherwise
4984 unspecified symbols to a given version node by using @samp{global: *;}
4985 somewhere in the version script. Note that it's slightly crazy to use
4986 wildcards in a global spec except on the last version node. Global
4987 wildcards elsewhere run the risk of accidentally adding symbols to the
4988 set exported for an old version. That's wrong since older versions
4989 ought to have a fixed set of symbols.
4990
4991 The names of the version nodes have no specific meaning other than what
4992 they might suggest to the person reading them. The @samp{2.0} version
4993 could just as well have appeared in between @samp{1.1} and @samp{1.2}.
4994 However, this would be a confusing way to write a version script.
4995
4996 Node name can be omitted, provided it is the only version node
4997 in the version script. Such version script doesn't assign any versions to
4998 symbols, only selects which symbols will be globally visible out and which
4999 won't.
5000
5001 @smallexample
5002 @{ global: foo; bar; local: *; @};
5003 @end smallexample
5004
5005 When you link an application against a shared library that has versioned
5006 symbols, the application itself knows which version of each symbol it
5007 requires, and it also knows which version nodes it needs from each
5008 shared library it is linked against. Thus at runtime, the dynamic
5009 loader can make a quick check to make sure that the libraries you have
5010 linked against do in fact supply all of the version nodes that the
5011 application will need to resolve all of the dynamic symbols. In this
5012 way it is possible for the dynamic linker to know with certainty that
5013 all external symbols that it needs will be resolvable without having to
5014 search for each symbol reference.
5015
5016 The symbol versioning is in effect a much more sophisticated way of
5017 doing minor version checking that SunOS does. The fundamental problem
5018 that is being addressed here is that typically references to external
5019 functions are bound on an as-needed basis, and are not all bound when
5020 the application starts up. If a shared library is out of date, a
5021 required interface may be missing; when the application tries to use
5022 that interface, it may suddenly and unexpectedly fail. With symbol
5023 versioning, the user will get a warning when they start their program if
5024 the libraries being used with the application are too old.
5025
5026 There are several GNU extensions to Sun's versioning approach. The
5027 first of these is the ability to bind a symbol to a version node in the
5028 source file where the symbol is defined instead of in the versioning
5029 script. This was done mainly to reduce the burden on the library
5030 maintainer. You can do this by putting something like:
5031 @smallexample
5032 __asm__(".symver original_foo,foo@@VERS_1.1");
5033 @end smallexample
5034 @noindent
5035 in the C source file. This renames the function @samp{original_foo} to
5036 be an alias for @samp{foo} bound to the version node @samp{VERS_1.1}.
5037 The @samp{local:} directive can be used to prevent the symbol
5038 @samp{original_foo} from being exported. A @samp{.symver} directive
5039 takes precedence over a version script.
5040
5041 The second GNU extension is to allow multiple versions of the same
5042 function to appear in a given shared library. In this way you can make
5043 an incompatible change to an interface without increasing the major
5044 version number of the shared library, while still allowing applications
5045 linked against the old interface to continue to function.
5046
5047 To do this, you must use multiple @samp{.symver} directives in the
5048 source file. Here is an example:
5049
5050 @smallexample
5051 __asm__(".symver original_foo,foo@@");
5052 __asm__(".symver old_foo,foo@@VERS_1.1");
5053 __asm__(".symver old_foo1,foo@@VERS_1.2");
5054 __asm__(".symver new_foo,foo@@@@VERS_2.0");
5055 @end smallexample
5056
5057 In this example, @samp{foo@@} represents the symbol @samp{foo} bound to the
5058 unspecified base version of the symbol. The source file that contains this
5059 example would define 4 C functions: @samp{original_foo}, @samp{old_foo},
5060 @samp{old_foo1}, and @samp{new_foo}.
5061
5062 When you have multiple definitions of a given symbol, there needs to be
5063 some way to specify a default version to which external references to
5064 this symbol will be bound. You can do this with the
5065 @samp{foo@@@@VERS_2.0} type of @samp{.symver} directive. You can only
5066 declare one version of a symbol as the default in this manner; otherwise
5067 you would effectively have multiple definitions of the same symbol.
5068
5069 If you wish to bind a reference to a specific version of the symbol
5070 within the shared library, you can use the aliases of convenience
5071 (i.e., @samp{old_foo}), or you can use the @samp{.symver} directive to
5072 specifically bind to an external version of the function in question.
5073
5074 You can also specify the language in the version script:
5075
5076 @smallexample
5077 VERSION extern "lang" @{ version-script-commands @}
5078 @end smallexample
5079
5080 The supported @samp{lang}s are @samp{C}, @samp{C++}, and @samp{Java}.
5081 The linker will iterate over the list of symbols at the link time and
5082 demangle them according to @samp{lang} before matching them to the
5083 patterns specified in @samp{version-script-commands}. The default
5084 @samp{lang} is @samp{C}.
5085
5086 Demangled names may contains spaces and other special characters. As
5087 described above, you can use a glob pattern to match demangled names,
5088 or you can use a double-quoted string to match the string exactly. In
5089 the latter case, be aware that minor differences (such as differing
5090 whitespace) between the version script and the demangler output will
5091 cause a mismatch. As the exact string generated by the demangler
5092 might change in the future, even if the mangled name does not, you
5093 should check that all of your version directives are behaving as you
5094 expect when you upgrade.
5095
5096 @node Expressions
5097 @section Expressions in Linker Scripts
5098 @cindex expressions
5099 @cindex arithmetic
5100 The syntax for expressions in the linker script language is identical to
5101 that of C expressions. All expressions are evaluated as integers. All
5102 expressions are evaluated in the same size, which is 32 bits if both the
5103 host and target are 32 bits, and is otherwise 64 bits.
5104
5105 You can use and set symbol values in expressions.
5106
5107 The linker defines several special purpose builtin functions for use in
5108 expressions.
5109
5110 @menu
5111 * Constants:: Constants
5112 * Symbolic Constants:: Symbolic constants
5113 * Symbols:: Symbol Names
5114 * Orphan Sections:: Orphan Sections
5115 * Location Counter:: The Location Counter
5116 * Operators:: Operators
5117 * Evaluation:: Evaluation
5118 * Expression Section:: The Section of an Expression
5119 * Builtin Functions:: Builtin Functions
5120 @end menu
5121
5122 @node Constants
5123 @subsection Constants
5124 @cindex integer notation
5125 @cindex constants in linker scripts
5126 All constants are integers.
5127
5128 As in C, the linker considers an integer beginning with @samp{0} to be
5129 octal, and an integer beginning with @samp{0x} or @samp{0X} to be
5130 hexadecimal. Alternatively the linker accepts suffixes of @samp{h} or
5131 @samp{H} for hexadeciaml, @samp{o} or @samp{O} for octal, @samp{b} or
5132 @samp{B} for binary and @samp{d} or @samp{D} for decimal. Any integer
5133 value without a prefix or a suffix is considered to be decimal.
5134
5135 @cindex scaled integers
5136 @cindex K and M integer suffixes
5137 @cindex M and K integer suffixes
5138 @cindex suffixes for integers
5139 @cindex integer suffixes
5140 In addition, you can use the suffixes @code{K} and @code{M} to scale a
5141 constant by
5142 @c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
5143 @ifnottex
5144 @c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
5145 @code{1024} or @code{1024*1024}
5146 @c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
5147 @end ifnottex
5148 @tex
5149 ${\rm 1024}$ or ${\rm 1024}^2$
5150 @end tex
5151 @c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
5152 respectively. For example, the following
5153 all refer to the same quantity:
5154
5155 @smallexample
5156 _fourk_1 = 4K;
5157 _fourk_2 = 4096;
5158 _fourk_3 = 0x1000;
5159 _fourk_4 = 10000o;
5160 @end smallexample
5161
5162 Note - the @code{K} and @code{M} suffixes cannot be used in
5163 conjunction with the base suffixes mentioned above.
5164
5165 @node Symbolic Constants
5166 @subsection Symbolic Constants
5167 @cindex symbolic constants
5168 @kindex CONSTANT
5169 It is possible to refer to target specific constants via the use of
5170 the @code{CONSTANT(@var{name})} operator, where @var{name} is one of:
5171
5172 @table @code
5173 @item MAXPAGESIZE
5174 @kindex MAXPAGESIZE
5175 The target's maximum page size.
5176
5177 @item COMMONPAGESIZE
5178 @kindex COMMONPAGESIZE
5179 The target's default page size.
5180 @end table
5181
5182 So for example:
5183
5184 @smallexample
5185 .text ALIGN (CONSTANT (MAXPAGESIZE)) : @{ *(.text) @}
5186 @end smallexample
5187
5188 will create a text section aligned to the largest page boundary
5189 supported by the target.
5190
5191 @node Symbols
5192 @subsection Symbol Names
5193 @cindex symbol names
5194 @cindex names
5195 @cindex quoted symbol names
5196 @kindex "
5197 Unless quoted, symbol names start with a letter, underscore, or period
5198 and may include letters, digits, underscores, periods, and hyphens.
5199 Unquoted symbol names must not conflict with any keywords. You can
5200 specify a symbol which contains odd characters or has the same name as a
5201 keyword by surrounding the symbol name in double quotes:
5202 @smallexample
5203 "SECTION" = 9;
5204 "with a space" = "also with a space" + 10;
5205 @end smallexample
5206
5207 Since symbols can contain many non-alphabetic characters, it is safest
5208 to delimit symbols with spaces. For example, @samp{A-B} is one symbol,
5209 whereas @samp{A - B} is an expression involving subtraction.
5210
5211 @node Orphan Sections
5212 @subsection Orphan Sections
5213 @cindex orphan
5214 Orphan sections are sections present in the input files which
5215 are not explicitly placed into the output file by the linker
5216 script. The linker will still copy these sections into the
5217 output file, but it has to guess as to where they should be
5218 placed. The linker uses a simple heuristic to do this. It
5219 attempts to place orphan sections after non-orphan sections of the
5220 same attribute, such as code vs data, loadable vs non-loadable, etc.
5221 If there is not enough room to do this then it places
5222 at the end of the file.
5223
5224 For ELF targets, the attribute of the section includes section type as
5225 well as section flag.
5226
5227 If an orphaned section's name is representable as a C identifier then
5228 the linker will automatically @pxref{PROVIDE} two symbols:
5229 __start_SECNAME and __end_SECNAME, where SECNAME is the name of the
5230 section. These indicate the start address and end address of the
5231 orphaned section respectively. Note: most section names are not
5232 representable as C identifiers because they contain a @samp{.}
5233 character.
5234
5235 @node Location Counter
5236 @subsection The Location Counter
5237 @kindex .
5238 @cindex dot
5239 @cindex location counter
5240 @cindex current output location
5241 The special linker variable @dfn{dot} @samp{.} always contains the
5242 current output location counter. Since the @code{.} always refers to a
5243 location in an output section, it may only appear in an expression
5244 within a @code{SECTIONS} command. The @code{.} symbol may appear
5245 anywhere that an ordinary symbol is allowed in an expression.
5246
5247 @cindex holes
5248 Assigning a value to @code{.} will cause the location counter to be
5249 moved. This may be used to create holes in the output section. The
5250 location counter may not be moved backwards inside an output section,
5251 and may not be moved backwards outside of an output section if so
5252 doing creates areas with overlapping LMAs.
5253
5254 @smallexample
5255 SECTIONS
5256 @{
5257 output :
5258 @{
5259 file1(.text)
5260 . = . + 1000;
5261 file2(.text)
5262 . += 1000;
5263 file3(.text)
5264 @} = 0x12345678;
5265 @}
5266 @end smallexample
5267 @noindent
5268 In the previous example, the @samp{.text} section from @file{file1} is
5269 located at the beginning of the output section @samp{output}. It is
5270 followed by a 1000 byte gap. Then the @samp{.text} section from
5271 @file{file2} appears, also with a 1000 byte gap following before the
5272 @samp{.text} section from @file{file3}. The notation @samp{= 0x12345678}
5273 specifies what data to write in the gaps (@pxref{Output Section Fill}).
5274
5275 @cindex dot inside sections
5276 Note: @code{.} actually refers to the byte offset from the start of the
5277 current containing object. Normally this is the @code{SECTIONS}
5278 statement, whose start address is 0, hence @code{.} can be used as an
5279 absolute address. If @code{.} is used inside a section description
5280 however, it refers to the byte offset from the start of that section,
5281 not an absolute address. Thus in a script like this:
5282
5283 @smallexample
5284 SECTIONS
5285 @{
5286 . = 0x100
5287 .text: @{
5288 *(.text)
5289 . = 0x200
5290 @}
5291 . = 0x500
5292 .data: @{
5293 *(.data)
5294 . += 0x600
5295 @}
5296 @}
5297 @end smallexample
5298
5299 The @samp{.text} section will be assigned a starting address of 0x100
5300 and a size of exactly 0x200 bytes, even if there is not enough data in
5301 the @samp{.text} input sections to fill this area. (If there is too
5302 much data, an error will be produced because this would be an attempt to
5303 move @code{.} backwards). The @samp{.data} section will start at 0x500
5304 and it will have an extra 0x600 bytes worth of space after the end of
5305 the values from the @samp{.data} input sections and before the end of
5306 the @samp{.data} output section itself.
5307
5308 @cindex dot outside sections
5309 Setting symbols to the value of the location counter outside of an
5310 output section statement can result in unexpected values if the linker
5311 needs to place orphan sections. For example, given the following:
5312
5313 @smallexample
5314 SECTIONS
5315 @{
5316 start_of_text = . ;
5317 .text: @{ *(.text) @}
5318 end_of_text = . ;
5319
5320 start_of_data = . ;
5321 .data: @{ *(.data) @}
5322 end_of_data = . ;
5323 @}
5324 @end smallexample
5325
5326 If the linker needs to place some input section, e.g. @code{.rodata},
5327 not mentioned in the script, it might choose to place that section
5328 between @code{.text} and @code{.data}. You might think the linker
5329 should place @code{.rodata} on the blank line in the above script, but
5330 blank lines are of no particular significance to the linker. As well,
5331 the linker doesn't associate the above symbol names with their
5332 sections. Instead, it assumes that all assignments or other
5333 statements belong to the previous output section, except for the
5334 special case of an assignment to @code{.}. I.e., the linker will
5335 place the orphan @code{.rodata} section as if the script was written
5336 as follows:
5337
5338 @smallexample
5339 SECTIONS
5340 @{
5341 start_of_text = . ;
5342 .text: @{ *(.text) @}
5343 end_of_text = . ;
5344
5345 start_of_data = . ;
5346 .rodata: @{ *(.rodata) @}
5347 .data: @{ *(.data) @}
5348 end_of_data = . ;
5349 @}
5350 @end smallexample
5351
5352 This may or may not be the script author's intention for the value of
5353 @code{start_of_data}. One way to influence the orphan section
5354 placement is to assign the location counter to itself, as the linker
5355 assumes that an assignment to @code{.} is setting the start address of
5356 a following output section and thus should be grouped with that
5357 section. So you could write:
5358
5359 @smallexample
5360 SECTIONS
5361 @{
5362 start_of_text = . ;
5363 .text: @{ *(.text) @}
5364 end_of_text = . ;
5365
5366 . = . ;
5367 start_of_data = . ;
5368 .data: @{ *(.data) @}
5369 end_of_data = . ;
5370 @}
5371 @end smallexample
5372
5373 Now, the orphan @code{.rodata} section will be placed between
5374 @code{end_of_text} and @code{start_of_data}.
5375
5376 @need 2000
5377 @node Operators
5378 @subsection Operators
5379 @cindex operators for arithmetic
5380 @cindex arithmetic operators
5381 @cindex precedence in expressions
5382 The linker recognizes the standard C set of arithmetic operators, with
5383 the standard bindings and precedence levels:
5384 @c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
5385 @ifnottex
5386 @c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
5387 @smallexample
5388 precedence associativity Operators Notes
5389 (highest)
5390 1 left ! - ~ (1)
5391 2 left * / %
5392 3 left + -
5393 4 left >> <<
5394 5 left == != > < <= >=
5395 6 left &
5396 7 left |
5397 8 left &&
5398 9 left ||
5399 10 right ? :
5400 11 right &= += -= *= /= (2)
5401 (lowest)
5402 @end smallexample
5403 Notes:
5404 (1) Prefix operators
5405 (2) @xref{Assignments}.
5406 @c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
5407 @end ifnottex
5408 @tex
5409 \vskip \baselineskip
5410 %"lispnarrowing" is the extra indent used generally for smallexample
5411 \hskip\lispnarrowing\vbox{\offinterlineskip
5412 \hrule
5413 \halign
5414 {\vrule#&\strut\hfil\ #\ \hfil&\vrule#&\strut\hfil\ #\ \hfil&\vrule#&\strut\hfil\ {\tt #}\ \hfil&\vrule#\cr
5415 height2pt&\omit&&\omit&&\omit&\cr
5416 &Precedence&& Associativity &&{\rm Operators}&\cr
5417 height2pt&\omit&&\omit&&\omit&\cr
5418 \noalign{\hrule}
5419 height2pt&\omit&&\omit&&\omit&\cr
5420 &highest&&&&&\cr
5421 % '176 is tilde, '~' in tt font
5422 &1&&left&&\qquad- \char'176\ !\qquad\dag&\cr
5423 &2&&left&&* / \%&\cr
5424 &3&&left&&+ -&\cr
5425 &4&&left&&>> <<&\cr
5426 &5&&left&&== != > < <= >=&\cr
5427 &6&&left&&\&&\cr
5428 &7&&left&&|&\cr
5429 &8&&left&&{\&\&}&\cr
5430 &9&&left&&||&\cr
5431 &10&&right&&? :&\cr
5432 &11&&right&&\qquad\&= += -= *= /=\qquad\ddag&\cr
5433 &lowest&&&&&\cr
5434 height2pt&\omit&&\omit&&\omit&\cr}
5435 \hrule}
5436 @end tex
5437 @iftex
5438 {
5439 @obeylines@parskip=0pt@parindent=0pt
5440 @dag@quad Prefix operators.
5441 @ddag@quad @xref{Assignments}.
5442 }
5443 @end iftex
5444 @c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
5445
5446 @node Evaluation
5447 @subsection Evaluation
5448 @cindex lazy evaluation
5449 @cindex expression evaluation order
5450 The linker evaluates expressions lazily. It only computes the value of
5451 an expression when absolutely necessary.
5452
5453 The linker needs some information, such as the value of the start
5454 address of the first section, and the origins and lengths of memory
5455 regions, in order to do any linking at all. These values are computed
5456 as soon as possible when the linker reads in the linker script.
5457
5458 However, other values (such as symbol values) are not known or needed
5459 until after storage allocation. Such values are evaluated later, when
5460 other information (such as the sizes of output sections) is available
5461 for use in the symbol assignment expression.
5462
5463 The sizes of sections cannot be known until after allocation, so
5464 assignments dependent upon these are not performed until after
5465 allocation.
5466
5467 Some expressions, such as those depending upon the location counter
5468 @samp{.}, must be evaluated during section allocation.
5469
5470 If the result of an expression is required, but the value is not
5471 available, then an error results. For example, a script like the
5472 following
5473 @smallexample
5474 @group
5475 SECTIONS
5476 @{
5477 .text 9+this_isnt_constant :
5478 @{ *(.text) @}
5479 @}
5480 @end group
5481 @end smallexample
5482 @noindent
5483 will cause the error message @samp{non constant expression for initial
5484 address}.
5485
5486 @node Expression Section
5487 @subsection The Section of an Expression
5488 @cindex expression sections
5489 @cindex absolute expressions
5490 @cindex relative expressions
5491 @cindex absolute and relocatable symbols
5492 @cindex relocatable and absolute symbols
5493 @cindex symbols, relocatable and absolute
5494 Addresses and symbols may be section relative, or absolute. A section
5495 relative symbol is relocatable. If you request relocatable output
5496 using the @samp{-r} option, a further link operation may change the
5497 value of a section relative symbol. On the other hand, an absolute
5498 symbol will retain the same value throughout any further link
5499 operations.
5500
5501 Some terms in linker expressions are addresses. This is true of
5502 section relative symbols and for builtin functions that return an
5503 address, such as @code{ADDR}, @code{LOADADDR}, @code{ORIGIN} and
5504 @code{SEGMENT_START}. Other terms are simply numbers, or are builtin
5505 functions that return a non-address value, such as @code{LENGTH}.
5506
5507 When the linker evaluates an expression, the result depends on where
5508 the expression is located in a linker script. Expressions appearing
5509 outside an output section definitions are evaluated with all terms
5510 first being converted to absolute addresses before applying operators,
5511 and evaluate to an absolute address result. Expressions appearing
5512 inside an output section definition are evaluated with more complex
5513 rules, but the aim is to treat terms as relative addresses and produce
5514 a relative address result. In particular, an assignment of a number
5515 to a symbol results in a symbol relative to the output section with an
5516 offset given by the number. So, in the following simple example,
5517
5518 @smallexample
5519 @group
5520 SECTIONS
5521 @{
5522 . = 0x100;
5523 __executable_start = 0x100;
5524 .data :
5525 @{
5526 . = 0x10;
5527 __data_start = 0x10;
5528 *(.data)
5529 @}
5530 @dots{}
5531 @}
5532 @end group
5533 @end smallexample
5534
5535 both @code{.} and @code{__executable_start} are set to the absolute
5536 address 0x100 in the first two assignments, then both @code{.} and
5537 @code{__data_start} are set to 0x10 relative to the @code{.data}
5538 section in the second two assignments.
5539
5540 For expressions appearing inside an output section definition
5541 involving numbers, relative addresses and absolute addresses, ld
5542 follows these rules to evaluate terms:
5543
5544 @itemize @bullet
5545 @item
5546 Unary operations on a relative address, and binary operations on two
5547 relative addresses in the same section or between one relative address
5548 and a number, apply the operator to the offset part of the address(es).
5549 @item
5550 Unary operations on an absolute address, and binary operations on one
5551 or more absolute addresses or on two relative addresses not in the
5552 same section, first convert any non-absolute term to an absolute
5553 address before applying the operator.
5554 @end itemize
5555
5556 The result section of each sub-expression is as follows:
5557
5558 @itemize @bullet
5559 @item
5560 An operation involving only numbers results in a number.
5561 @item
5562 The result of comparisons, @samp{&&} and @samp{||} is also a number.
5563 @item
5564 The result of other operations on relative addresses (after above
5565 conversions) is a relative address in the same section as the operand(s).
5566 @item
5567 The result of other operations on absolute addresses (after above
5568 conversions) is an absolute address.
5569 @end itemize
5570
5571 You can use the builtin function @code{ABSOLUTE} to force an expression
5572 to be absolute when it would otherwise be relative. For example, to
5573 create an absolute symbol set to the address of the end of the output
5574 section @samp{.data}:
5575 @smallexample
5576 SECTIONS
5577 @{
5578 .data : @{ *(.data) _edata = ABSOLUTE(.); @}
5579 @}
5580 @end smallexample
5581 @noindent
5582 If @samp{ABSOLUTE} were not used, @samp{_edata} would be relative to the
5583 @samp{.data} section.
5584
5585 Using @code{LOADADDR} also forces an expression absolute, since this
5586 particular builtin function returns an absolute address.
5587
5588 @node Builtin Functions
5589 @subsection Builtin Functions
5590 @cindex functions in expressions
5591 The linker script language includes a number of builtin functions for
5592 use in linker script expressions.
5593
5594 @table @code
5595 @item ABSOLUTE(@var{exp})
5596 @kindex ABSOLUTE(@var{exp})
5597 @cindex expression, absolute
5598 Return the absolute (non-relocatable, as opposed to non-negative) value
5599 of the expression @var{exp}. Primarily useful to assign an absolute
5600 value to a symbol within a section definition, where symbol values are
5601 normally section relative. @xref{Expression Section}.
5602
5603 @item ADDR(@var{section})
5604 @kindex ADDR(@var{section})
5605 @cindex section address in expression
5606 Return the address (VMA) of the named @var{section}. Your
5607 script must previously have defined the location of that section. In
5608 the following example, @code{start_of_output_1}, @code{symbol_1} and
5609 @code{symbol_2} are assigned equivalent values, except that
5610 @code{symbol_1} will be relative to the @code{.output1} section while
5611 the other two will be absolute:
5612 @smallexample
5613 @group
5614 SECTIONS @{ @dots{}
5615 .output1 :
5616 @{
5617 start_of_output_1 = ABSOLUTE(.);
5618 @dots{}
5619 @}
5620 .output :
5621 @{
5622 symbol_1 = ADDR(.output1);
5623 symbol_2 = start_of_output_1;
5624 @}
5625 @dots{} @}
5626 @end group
5627 @end smallexample
5628
5629 @item ALIGN(@var{align})
5630 @itemx ALIGN(@var{exp},@var{align})
5631 @kindex ALIGN(@var{align})
5632 @kindex ALIGN(@var{exp},@var{align})
5633 @cindex round up location counter
5634 @cindex align location counter
5635 @cindex round up expression
5636 @cindex align expression
5637 Return the location counter (@code{.}) or arbitrary expression aligned
5638 to the next @var{align} boundary. The single operand @code{ALIGN}
5639 doesn't change the value of the location counter---it just does
5640 arithmetic on it. The two operand @code{ALIGN} allows an arbitrary
5641 expression to be aligned upwards (@code{ALIGN(@var{align})} is
5642 equivalent to @code{ALIGN(., @var{align})}).
5643
5644 Here is an example which aligns the output @code{.data} section to the
5645 next @code{0x2000} byte boundary after the preceding section and sets a
5646 variable within the section to the next @code{0x8000} boundary after the
5647 input sections:
5648 @smallexample
5649 @group
5650 SECTIONS @{ @dots{}
5651 .data ALIGN(0x2000): @{
5652 *(.data)
5653 variable = ALIGN(0x8000);
5654 @}
5655 @dots{} @}
5656 @end group
5657 @end smallexample
5658 @noindent
5659 The first use of @code{ALIGN} in this example specifies the location of
5660 a section because it is used as the optional @var{address} attribute of
5661 a section definition (@pxref{Output Section Address}). The second use
5662 of @code{ALIGN} is used to defines the value of a symbol.
5663
5664 The builtin function @code{NEXT} is closely related to @code{ALIGN}.
5665
5666 @item ALIGNOF(@var{section})
5667 @kindex ALIGNOF(@var{section})
5668 @cindex section alignment
5669 Return the alignment in bytes of the named @var{section}, if that section has
5670 been allocated. If the section has not been allocated when this is
5671 evaluated, the linker will report an error. In the following example,
5672 the alignment of the @code{.output} section is stored as the first
5673 value in that section.
5674 @smallexample
5675 @group
5676 SECTIONS@{ @dots{}
5677 .output @{
5678 LONG (ALIGNOF (.output))
5679 @dots{}
5680 @}
5681 @dots{} @}
5682 @end group
5683 @end smallexample
5684
5685 @item BLOCK(@var{exp})
5686 @kindex BLOCK(@var{exp})
5687 This is a synonym for @code{ALIGN}, for compatibility with older linker
5688 scripts. It is most often seen when setting the address of an output
5689 section.
5690
5691 @item DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN(@var{maxpagesize}, @var{commonpagesize})
5692 @kindex DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN(@var{maxpagesize}, @var{commonpagesize})
5693 This is equivalent to either
5694 @smallexample
5695 (ALIGN(@var{maxpagesize}) + (. & (@var{maxpagesize} - 1)))
5696 @end smallexample
5697 or
5698 @smallexample
5699 (ALIGN(@var{maxpagesize}) + (. & (@var{maxpagesize} - @var{commonpagesize})))
5700 @end smallexample
5701 @noindent
5702 depending on whether the latter uses fewer @var{commonpagesize} sized pages
5703 for the data segment (area between the result of this expression and
5704 @code{DATA_SEGMENT_END}) than the former or not.
5705 If the latter form is used, it means @var{commonpagesize} bytes of runtime
5706 memory will be saved at the expense of up to @var{commonpagesize} wasted
5707 bytes in the on-disk file.
5708
5709 This expression can only be used directly in @code{SECTIONS} commands, not in
5710 any output section descriptions and only once in the linker script.
5711 @var{commonpagesize} should be less or equal to @var{maxpagesize} and should
5712 be the system page size the object wants to be optimized for (while still
5713 working on system page sizes up to @var{maxpagesize}).
5714
5715 @noindent
5716 Example:
5717 @smallexample
5718 . = DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN(0x10000, 0x2000);
5719 @end smallexample
5720
5721 @item DATA_SEGMENT_END(@var{exp})
5722 @kindex DATA_SEGMENT_END(@var{exp})
5723 This defines the end of data segment for @code{DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN}
5724 evaluation purposes.
5725
5726 @smallexample
5727 . = DATA_SEGMENT_END(.);
5728 @end smallexample
5729
5730 @item DATA_SEGMENT_RELRO_END(@var{offset}, @var{exp})
5731 @kindex DATA_SEGMENT_RELRO_END(@var{offset}, @var{exp})
5732 This defines the end of the @code{PT_GNU_RELRO} segment when
5733 @samp{-z relro} option is used. Second argument is returned.
5734 When @samp{-z relro} option is not present, @code{DATA_SEGMENT_RELRO_END}
5735 does nothing, otherwise @code{DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN} is padded so that
5736 @var{exp} + @var{offset} is aligned to the most commonly used page
5737 boundary for particular target. If present in the linker script,
5738 it must always come in between @code{DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN} and
5739 @code{DATA_SEGMENT_END}.
5740
5741 @smallexample
5742 . = DATA_SEGMENT_RELRO_END(24, .);
5743 @end smallexample
5744
5745 @item DEFINED(@var{symbol})
5746 @kindex DEFINED(@var{symbol})
5747 @cindex symbol defaults
5748 Return 1 if @var{symbol} is in the linker global symbol table and is
5749 defined before the statement using DEFINED in the script, otherwise
5750 return 0. You can use this function to provide
5751 default values for symbols. For example, the following script fragment
5752 shows how to set a global symbol @samp{begin} to the first location in
5753 the @samp{.text} section---but if a symbol called @samp{begin} already
5754 existed, its value is preserved:
5755
5756 @smallexample
5757 @group
5758 SECTIONS @{ @dots{}
5759 .text : @{
5760 begin = DEFINED(begin) ? begin : . ;
5761 @dots{}
5762 @}
5763 @dots{}
5764 @}
5765 @end group
5766 @end smallexample
5767
5768 @item LENGTH(@var{memory})
5769 @kindex LENGTH(@var{memory})
5770 Return the length of the memory region named @var{memory}.
5771
5772 @item LOADADDR(@var{section})
5773 @kindex LOADADDR(@var{section})
5774 @cindex section load address in expression
5775 Return the absolute LMA of the named @var{section}. (@pxref{Output
5776 Section LMA}).
5777
5778 @kindex MAX
5779 @item MAX(@var{exp1}, @var{exp2})
5780 Returns the maximum of @var{exp1} and @var{exp2}.
5781
5782 @kindex MIN
5783 @item MIN(@var{exp1}, @var{exp2})
5784 Returns the minimum of @var{exp1} and @var{exp2}.
5785
5786 @item NEXT(@var{exp})
5787 @kindex NEXT(@var{exp})
5788 @cindex unallocated address, next
5789 Return the next unallocated address that is a multiple of @var{exp}.
5790 This function is closely related to @code{ALIGN(@var{exp})}; unless you
5791 use the @code{MEMORY} command to define discontinuous memory for the
5792 output file, the two functions are equivalent.
5793
5794 @item ORIGIN(@var{memory})
5795 @kindex ORIGIN(@var{memory})
5796 Return the origin of the memory region named @var{memory}.
5797
5798 @item SEGMENT_START(@var{segment}, @var{default})
5799 @kindex SEGMENT_START(@var{segment}, @var{default})
5800 Return the base address of the named @var{segment}. If an explicit
5801 value has been given for this segment (with a command-line @samp{-T}
5802 option) that value will be returned; otherwise the value will be
5803 @var{default}. At present, the @samp{-T} command-line option can only
5804 be used to set the base address for the ``text'', ``data'', and
5805 ``bss'' sections, but you can use @code{SEGMENT_START} with any segment
5806 name.
5807
5808 @item SIZEOF(@var{section})
5809 @kindex SIZEOF(@var{section})
5810 @cindex section size
5811 Return the size in bytes of the named @var{section}, if that section has
5812 been allocated. If the section has not been allocated when this is
5813 evaluated, the linker will report an error. In the following example,
5814 @code{symbol_1} and @code{symbol_2} are assigned identical values:
5815 @smallexample
5816 @group
5817 SECTIONS@{ @dots{}
5818 .output @{
5819 .start = . ;
5820 @dots{}
5821 .end = . ;
5822 @}
5823 symbol_1 = .end - .start ;
5824 symbol_2 = SIZEOF(.output);
5825 @dots{} @}
5826 @end group
5827 @end smallexample
5828
5829 @item SIZEOF_HEADERS
5830 @itemx sizeof_headers
5831 @kindex SIZEOF_HEADERS
5832 @cindex header size
5833 Return the size in bytes of the output file's headers. This is
5834 information which appears at the start of the output file. You can use
5835 this number when setting the start address of the first section, if you
5836 choose, to facilitate paging.
5837
5838 @cindex not enough room for program headers
5839 @cindex program headers, not enough room
5840 When producing an ELF output file, if the linker script uses the
5841 @code{SIZEOF_HEADERS} builtin function, the linker must compute the
5842 number of program headers before it has determined all the section
5843 addresses and sizes. If the linker later discovers that it needs
5844 additional program headers, it will report an error @samp{not enough
5845 room for program headers}. To avoid this error, you must avoid using
5846 the @code{SIZEOF_HEADERS} function, or you must rework your linker
5847 script to avoid forcing the linker to use additional program headers, or
5848 you must define the program headers yourself using the @code{PHDRS}
5849 command (@pxref{PHDRS}).
5850 @end table
5851
5852 @node Implicit Linker Scripts
5853 @section Implicit Linker Scripts
5854 @cindex implicit linker scripts
5855 If you specify a linker input file which the linker can not recognize as
5856 an object file or an archive file, it will try to read the file as a
5857 linker script. If the file can not be parsed as a linker script, the
5858 linker will report an error.
5859
5860 An implicit linker script will not replace the default linker script.
5861
5862 Typically an implicit linker script would contain only symbol
5863 assignments, or the @code{INPUT}, @code{GROUP}, or @code{VERSION}
5864 commands.
5865
5866 Any input files read because of an implicit linker script will be read
5867 at the position in the command line where the implicit linker script was
5868 read. This can affect archive searching.
5869
5870 @ifset GENERIC
5871 @node Machine Dependent
5872 @chapter Machine Dependent Features
5873
5874 @cindex machine dependencies
5875 @command{ld} has additional features on some platforms; the following
5876 sections describe them. Machines where @command{ld} has no additional
5877 functionality are not listed.
5878
5879 @menu
5880 @ifset H8300
5881 * H8/300:: @command{ld} and the H8/300
5882 @end ifset
5883 @ifset I960
5884 * i960:: @command{ld} and the Intel 960 family
5885 @end ifset
5886 @ifset ARM
5887 * ARM:: @command{ld} and the ARM family
5888 @end ifset
5889 @ifset HPPA
5890 * HPPA ELF32:: @command{ld} and HPPA 32-bit ELF
5891 @end ifset
5892 @ifset M68K
5893 * M68K:: @command{ld} and the Motorola 68K family
5894 @end ifset
5895 @ifset MMIX
5896 * MMIX:: @command{ld} and MMIX
5897 @end ifset
5898 @ifset MSP430
5899 * MSP430:: @command{ld} and MSP430
5900 @end ifset
5901 @ifset M68HC11
5902 * M68HC11/68HC12:: @code{ld} and the Motorola 68HC11 and 68HC12 families
5903 @end ifset
5904 @ifset POWERPC
5905 * PowerPC ELF32:: @command{ld} and PowerPC 32-bit ELF Support
5906 @end ifset
5907 @ifset POWERPC64
5908 * PowerPC64 ELF64:: @command{ld} and PowerPC64 64-bit ELF Support
5909 @end ifset
5910 @ifset SPU
5911 * SPU ELF:: @command{ld} and SPU ELF Support
5912 @end ifset
5913 @ifset TICOFF
5914 * TI COFF:: @command{ld} and TI COFF
5915 @end ifset
5916 @ifset WIN32
5917 * WIN32:: @command{ld} and WIN32 (cygwin/mingw)
5918 @end ifset
5919 @ifset XTENSA
5920 * Xtensa:: @command{ld} and Xtensa Processors
5921 @end ifset
5922 @end menu
5923 @end ifset
5924
5925 @ifset H8300
5926 @ifclear GENERIC
5927 @raisesections
5928 @end ifclear
5929
5930 @node H8/300
5931 @section @command{ld} and the H8/300
5932
5933 @cindex H8/300 support
5934 For the H8/300, @command{ld} can perform these global optimizations when
5935 you specify the @samp{--relax} command-line option.
5936
5937 @table @emph
5938 @cindex relaxing on H8/300
5939 @item relaxing address modes
5940 @command{ld} finds all @code{jsr} and @code{jmp} instructions whose
5941 targets are within eight bits, and turns them into eight-bit
5942 program-counter relative @code{bsr} and @code{bra} instructions,
5943 respectively.
5944
5945 @cindex synthesizing on H8/300
5946 @item synthesizing instructions
5947 @c FIXME: specifically mov.b, or any mov instructions really?
5948 @command{ld} finds all @code{mov.b} instructions which use the
5949 sixteen-bit absolute address form, but refer to the top
5950 page of memory, and changes them to use the eight-bit address form.
5951 (That is: the linker turns @samp{mov.b @code{@@}@var{aa}:16} into
5952 @samp{mov.b @code{@@}@var{aa}:8} whenever the address @var{aa} is in the
5953 top page of memory).
5954
5955 @item bit manipulation instructions
5956 @command{ld} finds all bit manipulation instructions like @code{band, bclr,
5957 biand, bild, bior, bist, bixor, bld, bnot, bor, bset, bst, btst, bxor}
5958 which use 32 bit and 16 bit absolute address form, but refer to the top
5959 page of memory, and changes them to use the 8 bit address form.
5960 (That is: the linker turns @samp{bset #xx:3,@code{@@}@var{aa}:32} into
5961 @samp{bset #xx:3,@code{@@}@var{aa}:8} whenever the address @var{aa} is in
5962 the top page of memory).
5963
5964 @item system control instructions
5965 @command{ld} finds all @code{ldc.w, stc.w} instructions which use the
5966 32 bit absolute address form, but refer to the top page of memory, and
5967 changes them to use 16 bit address form.
5968 (That is: the linker turns @samp{ldc.w @code{@@}@var{aa}:32,ccr} into
5969 @samp{ldc.w @code{@@}@var{aa}:16,ccr} whenever the address @var{aa} is in
5970 the top page of memory).
5971 @end table
5972
5973 @ifclear GENERIC
5974 @lowersections
5975 @end ifclear
5976 @end ifset
5977
5978 @ifclear GENERIC
5979 @ifset Renesas
5980 @c This stuff is pointless to say unless you're especially concerned
5981 @c with Renesas chips; don't enable it for generic case, please.
5982 @node Renesas
5983 @chapter @command{ld} and Other Renesas Chips
5984
5985 @command{ld} also supports the Renesas (formerly Hitachi) H8/300H,
5986 H8/500, and SH chips. No special features, commands, or command-line
5987 options are required for these chips.
5988 @end ifset
5989 @end ifclear
5990
5991 @ifset I960
5992 @ifclear GENERIC
5993 @raisesections
5994 @end ifclear
5995
5996 @node i960
5997 @section @command{ld} and the Intel 960 Family
5998
5999 @cindex i960 support
6000
6001 You can use the @samp{-A@var{architecture}} command line option to
6002 specify one of the two-letter names identifying members of the 960
6003 family; the option specifies the desired output target, and warns of any
6004 incompatible instructions in the input files. It also modifies the
6005 linker's search strategy for archive libraries, to support the use of
6006 libraries specific to each particular architecture, by including in the
6007 search loop names suffixed with the string identifying the architecture.
6008
6009 For example, if your @command{ld} command line included @w{@samp{-ACA}} as
6010 well as @w{@samp{-ltry}}, the linker would look (in its built-in search
6011 paths, and in any paths you specify with @samp{-L}) for a library with
6012 the names
6013
6014 @smallexample
6015 @group
6016 try
6017 libtry.a
6018 tryca
6019 libtryca.a
6020 @end group
6021 @end smallexample
6022
6023 @noindent
6024 The first two possibilities would be considered in any event; the last
6025 two are due to the use of @w{@samp{-ACA}}.
6026
6027 You can meaningfully use @samp{-A} more than once on a command line, since
6028 the 960 architecture family allows combination of target architectures; each
6029 use will add another pair of name variants to search for when @w{@samp{-l}}
6030 specifies a library.
6031
6032 @cindex @option{--relax} on i960
6033 @cindex relaxing on i960
6034 @command{ld} supports the @samp{--relax} option for the i960 family. If
6035 you specify @samp{--relax}, @command{ld} finds all @code{balx} and
6036 @code{calx} instructions whose targets are within 24 bits, and turns
6037 them into 24-bit program-counter relative @code{bal} and @code{cal}
6038 instructions, respectively. @command{ld} also turns @code{cal}
6039 instructions into @code{bal} instructions when it determines that the
6040 target subroutine is a leaf routine (that is, the target subroutine does
6041 not itself call any subroutines).
6042
6043 @cindex Cortex-A8 erratum workaround
6044 @kindex --fix-cortex-a8
6045 @kindex --no-fix-cortex-a8
6046 The @samp{--fix-cortex-a8} switch enables a link-time workaround for an erratum in certain Cortex-A8 processors. The workaround is enabled by default if you are targeting the ARM v7-A architecture profile. It can be enabled otherwise by specifying @samp{--fix-cortex-a8}, or disabled unconditionally by specifying @samp{--no-fix-cortex-a8}.
6047
6048 The erratum only affects Thumb-2 code. Please contact ARM for further details.
6049
6050 @kindex --merge-exidx-entries
6051 @kindex --no-merge-exidx-entries
6052 The @samp{--no-merge-exidx-entries} switch disables the merging of adjacent exidx entries in debuginfo.
6053
6054 @ifclear GENERIC
6055 @lowersections
6056 @end ifclear
6057 @end ifset
6058
6059 @ifset ARM
6060 @ifclear GENERIC
6061 @raisesections
6062 @end ifclear
6063
6064 @ifset M68HC11
6065 @ifclear GENERIC
6066 @raisesections
6067 @end ifclear
6068
6069 @node M68HC11/68HC12
6070 @section @command{ld} and the Motorola 68HC11 and 68HC12 families
6071
6072 @cindex M68HC11 and 68HC12 support
6073
6074 @subsection Linker Relaxation
6075
6076 For the Motorola 68HC11, @command{ld} can perform these global
6077 optimizations when you specify the @samp{--relax} command-line option.
6078
6079 @table @emph
6080 @cindex relaxing on M68HC11
6081 @item relaxing address modes
6082 @command{ld} finds all @code{jsr} and @code{jmp} instructions whose
6083 targets are within eight bits, and turns them into eight-bit
6084 program-counter relative @code{bsr} and @code{bra} instructions,
6085 respectively.
6086
6087 @command{ld} also looks at all 16-bit extended addressing modes and
6088 transforms them in a direct addressing mode when the address is in
6089 page 0 (between 0 and 0x0ff).
6090
6091 @item relaxing gcc instruction group
6092 When @command{gcc} is called with @option{-mrelax}, it can emit group
6093 of instructions that the linker can optimize to use a 68HC11 direct
6094 addressing mode. These instructions consists of @code{bclr} or
6095 @code{bset} instructions.
6096
6097 @end table
6098
6099 @subsection Trampoline Generation
6100
6101 @cindex trampoline generation on M68HC11
6102 @cindex trampoline generation on M68HC12
6103 For 68HC11 and 68HC12, @command{ld} can generate trampoline code to
6104 call a far function using a normal @code{jsr} instruction. The linker
6105 will also change the relocation to some far function to use the
6106 trampoline address instead of the function address. This is typically the
6107 case when a pointer to a function is taken. The pointer will in fact
6108 point to the function trampoline.
6109
6110 @ifclear GENERIC
6111 @lowersections
6112 @end ifclear
6113 @end ifset
6114
6115 @node ARM
6116 @section @command{ld} and the ARM family
6117
6118 @cindex ARM interworking support
6119 @kindex --support-old-code
6120 For the ARM, @command{ld} will generate code stubs to allow functions calls
6121 between ARM and Thumb code. These stubs only work with code that has
6122 been compiled and assembled with the @samp{-mthumb-interwork} command
6123 line option. If it is necessary to link with old ARM object files or
6124 libraries, which have not been compiled with the -mthumb-interwork
6125 option then the @samp{--support-old-code} command line switch should be
6126 given to the linker. This will make it generate larger stub functions
6127 which will work with non-interworking aware ARM code. Note, however,
6128 the linker does not support generating stubs for function calls to
6129 non-interworking aware Thumb code.
6130
6131 @cindex thumb entry point
6132 @cindex entry point, thumb
6133 @kindex --thumb-entry=@var{entry}
6134 The @samp{--thumb-entry} switch is a duplicate of the generic
6135 @samp{--entry} switch, in that it sets the program's starting address.
6136 But it also sets the bottom bit of the address, so that it can be
6137 branched to using a BX instruction, and the program will start
6138 executing in Thumb mode straight away.
6139
6140 @cindex PE import table prefixing
6141 @kindex --use-nul-prefixed-import-tables
6142 The @samp{--use-nul-prefixed-import-tables} switch is specifying, that
6143 the import tables idata4 and idata5 have to be generated with a zero
6144 elememt prefix for import libraries. This is the old style to generate
6145 import tables. By default this option is turned off.
6146
6147 @cindex BE8
6148 @kindex --be8
6149 The @samp{--be8} switch instructs @command{ld} to generate BE8 format
6150 executables. This option is only valid when linking big-endian objects.
6151 The resulting image will contain big-endian data and little-endian code.
6152
6153 @cindex TARGET1
6154 @kindex --target1-rel
6155 @kindex --target1-abs
6156 The @samp{R_ARM_TARGET1} relocation is typically used for entries in the
6157 @samp{.init_array} section. It is interpreted as either @samp{R_ARM_REL32}
6158 or @samp{R_ARM_ABS32}, depending on the target. The @samp{--target1-rel}
6159 and @samp{--target1-abs} switches override the default.
6160
6161 @cindex TARGET2
6162 @kindex --target2=@var{type}
6163 The @samp{--target2=type} switch overrides the default definition of the
6164 @samp{R_ARM_TARGET2} relocation. Valid values for @samp{type}, their
6165 meanings, and target defaults are as follows:
6166 @table @samp
6167 @item rel
6168 @samp{R_ARM_REL32} (arm*-*-elf, arm*-*-eabi)
6169 @item abs
6170 @samp{R_ARM_ABS32} (arm*-*-symbianelf)
6171 @item got-rel
6172 @samp{R_ARM_GOT_PREL} (arm*-*-linux, arm*-*-*bsd)
6173 @end table
6174
6175 @cindex FIX_V4BX
6176 @kindex --fix-v4bx
6177 The @samp{R_ARM_V4BX} relocation (defined by the ARM AAELF
6178 specification) enables objects compiled for the ARMv4 architecture to be
6179 interworking-safe when linked with other objects compiled for ARMv4t, but
6180 also allows pure ARMv4 binaries to be built from the same ARMv4 objects.
6181
6182 In the latter case, the switch @option{--fix-v4bx} must be passed to the
6183 linker, which causes v4t @code{BX rM} instructions to be rewritten as
6184 @code{MOV PC,rM}, since v4 processors do not have a @code{BX} instruction.
6185
6186 In the former case, the switch should not be used, and @samp{R_ARM_V4BX}
6187 relocations are ignored.
6188
6189 @cindex FIX_V4BX_INTERWORKING
6190 @kindex --fix-v4bx-interworking
6191 Replace @code{BX rM} instructions identified by @samp{R_ARM_V4BX}
6192 relocations with a branch to the following veneer:
6193
6194 @smallexample
6195 TST rM, #1
6196 MOVEQ PC, rM
6197 BX Rn
6198 @end smallexample
6199
6200 This allows generation of libraries/applications that work on ARMv4 cores
6201 and are still interworking safe. Note that the above veneer clobbers the
6202 condition flags, so may cause incorrect progrm behavior in rare cases.
6203
6204 @cindex USE_BLX
6205 @kindex --use-blx
6206 The @samp{--use-blx} switch enables the linker to use ARM/Thumb
6207 BLX instructions (available on ARMv5t and above) in various
6208 situations. Currently it is used to perform calls via the PLT from Thumb
6209 code using BLX rather than using BX and a mode-switching stub before
6210 each PLT entry. This should lead to such calls executing slightly faster.
6211
6212 This option is enabled implicitly for SymbianOS, so there is no need to
6213 specify it if you are using that target.
6214
6215 @cindex VFP11_DENORM_FIX
6216 @kindex --vfp11-denorm-fix
6217 The @samp{--vfp11-denorm-fix} switch enables a link-time workaround for a
6218 bug in certain VFP11 coprocessor hardware, which sometimes allows
6219 instructions with denorm operands (which must be handled by support code)
6220 to have those operands overwritten by subsequent instructions before
6221 the support code can read the intended values.
6222
6223 The bug may be avoided in scalar mode if you allow at least one
6224 intervening instruction between a VFP11 instruction which uses a register
6225 and another instruction which writes to the same register, or at least two
6226 intervening instructions if vector mode is in use. The bug only affects
6227 full-compliance floating-point mode: you do not need this workaround if
6228 you are using "runfast" mode. Please contact ARM for further details.
6229
6230 If you know you are using buggy VFP11 hardware, you can
6231 enable this workaround by specifying the linker option
6232 @samp{--vfp-denorm-fix=scalar} if you are using the VFP11 scalar
6233 mode only, or @samp{--vfp-denorm-fix=vector} if you are using
6234 vector mode (the latter also works for scalar code). The default is
6235 @samp{--vfp-denorm-fix=none}.
6236
6237 If the workaround is enabled, instructions are scanned for
6238 potentially-troublesome sequences, and a veneer is created for each
6239 such sequence which may trigger the erratum. The veneer consists of the
6240 first instruction of the sequence and a branch back to the subsequent
6241 instruction. The original instruction is then replaced with a branch to
6242 the veneer. The extra cycles required to call and return from the veneer
6243 are sufficient to avoid the erratum in both the scalar and vector cases.
6244
6245 @cindex NO_ENUM_SIZE_WARNING
6246 @kindex --no-enum-size-warning
6247 The @option{--no-enum-size-warning} switch prevents the linker from
6248 warning when linking object files that specify incompatible EABI
6249 enumeration size attributes. For example, with this switch enabled,
6250 linking of an object file using 32-bit enumeration values with another
6251 using enumeration values fitted into the smallest possible space will
6252 not be diagnosed.
6253
6254 @cindex NO_WCHAR_SIZE_WARNING
6255 @kindex --no-wchar-size-warning
6256 The @option{--no-wchar-size-warning} switch prevents the linker from
6257 warning when linking object files that specify incompatible EABI
6258 @code{wchar_t} size attributes. For example, with this switch enabled,
6259 linking of an object file using 32-bit @code{wchar_t} values with another
6260 using 16-bit @code{wchar_t} values will not be diagnosed.
6261
6262 @cindex PIC_VENEER
6263 @kindex --pic-veneer
6264 The @samp{--pic-veneer} switch makes the linker use PIC sequences for
6265 ARM/Thumb interworking veneers, even if the rest of the binary
6266 is not PIC. This avoids problems on uClinux targets where
6267 @samp{--emit-relocs} is used to generate relocatable binaries.
6268
6269 @cindex STUB_GROUP_SIZE
6270 @kindex --stub-group-size=@var{N}
6271 The linker will automatically generate and insert small sequences of
6272 code into a linked ARM ELF executable whenever an attempt is made to
6273 perform a function call to a symbol that is too far away. The
6274 placement of these sequences of instructions - called stubs - is
6275 controlled by the command line option @option{--stub-group-size=N}.
6276 The placement is important because a poor choice can create a need for
6277 duplicate stubs, increasing the code sizw. The linker will try to
6278 group stubs together in order to reduce interruptions to the flow of
6279 code, but it needs guidance as to how big these groups should be and
6280 where they should be placed.
6281
6282 The value of @samp{N}, the parameter to the
6283 @option{--stub-group-size=} option controls where the stub groups are
6284 placed. If it is negative then all stubs are placed after the first
6285 branch that needs them. If it is positive then the stubs can be
6286 placed either before or after the branches that need them. If the
6287 value of @samp{N} is 1 (either +1 or -1) then the linker will choose
6288 exactly where to place groups of stubs, using its built in heuristics.
6289 A value of @samp{N} greater than 1 (or smaller than -1) tells the
6290 linker that a single group of stubs can service at most @samp{N} bytes
6291 from the input sections.
6292
6293 The default, if @option{--stub-group-size=} is not specified, is
6294 @samp{N = +1}.
6295
6296 Farcalls stubs insertion is fully supported for the ARM-EABI target
6297 only, because it relies on object files properties not present
6298 otherwise.
6299
6300 @ifclear GENERIC
6301 @lowersections
6302 @end ifclear
6303 @end ifset
6304
6305 @ifset HPPA
6306 @ifclear GENERIC
6307 @raisesections
6308 @end ifclear
6309
6310 @node HPPA ELF32
6311 @section @command{ld} and HPPA 32-bit ELF Support
6312 @cindex HPPA multiple sub-space stubs
6313 @kindex --multi-subspace
6314 When generating a shared library, @command{ld} will by default generate
6315 import stubs suitable for use with a single sub-space application.
6316 The @samp{--multi-subspace} switch causes @command{ld} to generate export
6317 stubs, and different (larger) import stubs suitable for use with
6318 multiple sub-spaces.
6319
6320 @cindex HPPA stub grouping
6321 @kindex --stub-group-size=@var{N}
6322 Long branch stubs and import/export stubs are placed by @command{ld} in
6323 stub sections located between groups of input sections.
6324 @samp{--stub-group-size} specifies the maximum size of a group of input
6325 sections handled by one stub section. Since branch offsets are signed,
6326 a stub section may serve two groups of input sections, one group before
6327 the stub section, and one group after it. However, when using
6328 conditional branches that require stubs, it may be better (for branch
6329 prediction) that stub sections only serve one group of input sections.
6330 A negative value for @samp{N} chooses this scheme, ensuring that
6331 branches to stubs always use a negative offset. Two special values of
6332 @samp{N} are recognized, @samp{1} and @samp{-1}. These both instruct
6333 @command{ld} to automatically size input section groups for the branch types
6334 detected, with the same behaviour regarding stub placement as other
6335 positive or negative values of @samp{N} respectively.
6336
6337 Note that @samp{--stub-group-size} does not split input sections. A
6338 single input section larger than the group size specified will of course
6339 create a larger group (of one section). If input sections are too
6340 large, it may not be possible for a branch to reach its stub.
6341
6342 @ifclear GENERIC
6343 @lowersections
6344 @end ifclear
6345 @end ifset
6346
6347 @ifset M68K
6348 @ifclear GENERIC
6349 @raisesections
6350 @end ifclear
6351
6352 @node M68K
6353 @section @command{ld} and the Motorola 68K family
6354
6355 @cindex Motorola 68K GOT generation
6356 @kindex --got=@var{type}
6357 The @samp{--got=@var{type}} option lets you choose the GOT generation scheme.
6358 The choices are @samp{single}, @samp{negative}, @samp{multigot} and
6359 @samp{target}. When @samp{target} is selected the linker chooses
6360 the default GOT generation scheme for the current target.
6361 @samp{single} tells the linker to generate a single GOT with
6362 entries only at non-negative offsets.
6363 @samp{negative} instructs the linker to generate a single GOT with
6364 entries at both negative and positive offsets. Not all environments
6365 support such GOTs.
6366 @samp{multigot} allows the linker to generate several GOTs in the
6367 output file. All GOT references from a single input object
6368 file access the same GOT, but references from different input object
6369 files might access different GOTs. Not all environments support such GOTs.
6370
6371 @ifclear GENERIC
6372 @lowersections
6373 @end ifclear
6374 @end ifset
6375
6376 @ifset MMIX
6377 @ifclear GENERIC
6378 @raisesections
6379 @end ifclear
6380
6381 @node MMIX
6382 @section @code{ld} and MMIX
6383 For MMIX, there is a choice of generating @code{ELF} object files or
6384 @code{mmo} object files when linking. The simulator @code{mmix}
6385 understands the @code{mmo} format. The binutils @code{objcopy} utility
6386 can translate between the two formats.
6387
6388 There is one special section, the @samp{.MMIX.reg_contents} section.
6389 Contents in this section is assumed to correspond to that of global
6390 registers, and symbols referring to it are translated to special symbols,
6391 equal to registers. In a final link, the start address of the
6392 @samp{.MMIX.reg_contents} section corresponds to the first allocated
6393 global register multiplied by 8. Register @code{$255} is not included in
6394 this section; it is always set to the program entry, which is at the
6395 symbol @code{Main} for @code{mmo} files.
6396
6397 Global symbols with the prefix @code{__.MMIX.start.}, for example
6398 @code{__.MMIX.start..text} and @code{__.MMIX.start..data} are special.
6399 The default linker script uses these to set the default start address
6400 of a section.
6401
6402 Initial and trailing multiples of zero-valued 32-bit words in a section,
6403 are left out from an mmo file.
6404
6405 @ifclear GENERIC
6406 @lowersections
6407 @end ifclear
6408 @end ifset
6409
6410 @ifset MSP430
6411 @ifclear GENERIC
6412 @raisesections
6413 @end ifclear
6414
6415 @node MSP430
6416 @section @code{ld} and MSP430
6417 For the MSP430 it is possible to select the MPU architecture. The flag @samp{-m [mpu type]}
6418 will select an appropriate linker script for selected MPU type. (To get a list of known MPUs
6419 just pass @samp{-m help} option to the linker).
6420
6421 @cindex MSP430 extra sections
6422 The linker will recognize some extra sections which are MSP430 specific:
6423
6424 @table @code
6425 @item @samp{.vectors}
6426 Defines a portion of ROM where interrupt vectors located.
6427
6428 @item @samp{.bootloader}
6429 Defines the bootloader portion of the ROM (if applicable). Any code
6430 in this section will be uploaded to the MPU.
6431
6432 @item @samp{.infomem}
6433 Defines an information memory section (if applicable). Any code in
6434 this section will be uploaded to the MPU.
6435
6436 @item @samp{.infomemnobits}
6437 This is the same as the @samp{.infomem} section except that any code
6438 in this section will not be uploaded to the MPU.
6439
6440 @item @samp{.noinit}
6441 Denotes a portion of RAM located above @samp{.bss} section.
6442
6443 The last two sections are used by gcc.
6444 @end table
6445
6446 @ifclear GENERIC
6447 @lowersections
6448 @end ifclear
6449 @end ifset
6450
6451 @ifset POWERPC
6452 @ifclear GENERIC
6453 @raisesections
6454 @end ifclear
6455
6456 @node PowerPC ELF32
6457 @section @command{ld} and PowerPC 32-bit ELF Support
6458 @cindex PowerPC long branches
6459 @kindex --relax on PowerPC
6460 Branches on PowerPC processors are limited to a signed 26-bit
6461 displacement, which may result in @command{ld} giving
6462 @samp{relocation truncated to fit} errors with very large programs.
6463 @samp{--relax} enables the generation of trampolines that can access
6464 the entire 32-bit address space. These trampolines are inserted at
6465 section boundaries, so may not themselves be reachable if an input
6466 section exceeds 33M in size. You may combine @samp{-r} and
6467 @samp{--relax} to add trampolines in a partial link. In that case
6468 both branches to undefined symbols and inter-section branches are also
6469 considered potentially out of range, and trampolines inserted.
6470
6471 @cindex PowerPC ELF32 options
6472 @table @option
6473 @cindex PowerPC PLT
6474 @kindex --bss-plt
6475 @item --bss-plt
6476 Current PowerPC GCC accepts a @samp{-msecure-plt} option that
6477 generates code capable of using a newer PLT and GOT layout that has
6478 the security advantage of no executable section ever needing to be
6479 writable and no writable section ever being executable. PowerPC
6480 @command{ld} will generate this layout, including stubs to access the
6481 PLT, if all input files (including startup and static libraries) were
6482 compiled with @samp{-msecure-plt}. @samp{--bss-plt} forces the old
6483 BSS PLT (and GOT layout) which can give slightly better performance.
6484
6485 @kindex --secure-plt
6486 @item --secure-plt
6487 @command{ld} will use the new PLT and GOT layout if it is linking new
6488 @samp{-fpic} or @samp{-fPIC} code, but does not do so automatically
6489 when linking non-PIC code. This option requests the new PLT and GOT
6490 layout. A warning will be given if some object file requires the old
6491 style BSS PLT.
6492
6493 @cindex PowerPC GOT
6494 @kindex --sdata-got
6495 @item --sdata-got
6496 The new secure PLT and GOT are placed differently relative to other
6497 sections compared to older BSS PLT and GOT placement. The location of
6498 @code{.plt} must change because the new secure PLT is an initialized
6499 section while the old PLT is uninitialized. The reason for the
6500 @code{.got} change is more subtle: The new placement allows
6501 @code{.got} to be read-only in applications linked with
6502 @samp{-z relro -z now}. However, this placement means that
6503 @code{.sdata} cannot always be used in shared libraries, because the
6504 PowerPC ABI accesses @code{.sdata} in shared libraries from the GOT
6505 pointer. @samp{--sdata-got} forces the old GOT placement. PowerPC
6506 GCC doesn't use @code{.sdata} in shared libraries, so this option is
6507 really only useful for other compilers that may do so.
6508
6509 @cindex PowerPC stub symbols
6510 @kindex --emit-stub-syms
6511 @item --emit-stub-syms
6512 This option causes @command{ld} to label linker stubs with a local
6513 symbol that encodes the stub type and destination.
6514
6515 @cindex PowerPC TLS optimization
6516 @kindex --no-tls-optimize
6517 @item --no-tls-optimize
6518 PowerPC @command{ld} normally performs some optimization of code
6519 sequences used to access Thread-Local Storage. Use this option to
6520 disable the optimization.
6521 @end table
6522
6523 @ifclear GENERIC
6524 @lowersections
6525 @end ifclear
6526 @end ifset
6527
6528 @ifset POWERPC64
6529 @ifclear GENERIC
6530 @raisesections
6531 @end ifclear
6532
6533 @node PowerPC64 ELF64
6534 @section @command{ld} and PowerPC64 64-bit ELF Support
6535
6536 @cindex PowerPC64 ELF64 options
6537 @table @option
6538 @cindex PowerPC64 stub grouping
6539 @kindex --stub-group-size
6540 @item --stub-group-size
6541 Long branch stubs, PLT call stubs and TOC adjusting stubs are placed
6542 by @command{ld} in stub sections located between groups of input sections.
6543 @samp{--stub-group-size} specifies the maximum size of a group of input
6544 sections handled by one stub section. Since branch offsets are signed,
6545 a stub section may serve two groups of input sections, one group before
6546 the stub section, and one group after it. However, when using
6547 conditional branches that require stubs, it may be better (for branch
6548 prediction) that stub sections only serve one group of input sections.
6549 A negative value for @samp{N} chooses this scheme, ensuring that
6550 branches to stubs always use a negative offset. Two special values of
6551 @samp{N} are recognized, @samp{1} and @samp{-1}. These both instruct
6552 @command{ld} to automatically size input section groups for the branch types
6553 detected, with the same behaviour regarding stub placement as other
6554 positive or negative values of @samp{N} respectively.
6555
6556 Note that @samp{--stub-group-size} does not split input sections. A
6557 single input section larger than the group size specified will of course
6558 create a larger group (of one section). If input sections are too
6559 large, it may not be possible for a branch to reach its stub.
6560
6561 @cindex PowerPC64 stub symbols
6562 @kindex --emit-stub-syms
6563 @item --emit-stub-syms
6564 This option causes @command{ld} to label linker stubs with a local
6565 symbol that encodes the stub type and destination.
6566
6567 @cindex PowerPC64 dot symbols
6568 @kindex --dotsyms
6569 @kindex --no-dotsyms
6570 @item --dotsyms, --no-dotsyms
6571 These two options control how @command{ld} interprets version patterns
6572 in a version script. Older PowerPC64 compilers emitted both a
6573 function descriptor symbol with the same name as the function, and a
6574 code entry symbol with the name prefixed by a dot (@samp{.}). To
6575 properly version a function @samp{foo}, the version script thus needs
6576 to control both @samp{foo} and @samp{.foo}. The option
6577 @samp{--dotsyms}, on by default, automatically adds the required
6578 dot-prefixed patterns. Use @samp{--no-dotsyms} to disable this
6579 feature.
6580
6581 @cindex PowerPC64 TLS optimization
6582 @kindex --no-tls-optimize
6583 @item --no-tls-optimize
6584 PowerPC64 @command{ld} normally performs some optimization of code
6585 sequences used to access Thread-Local Storage. Use this option to
6586 disable the optimization.
6587
6588 @cindex PowerPC64 OPD optimization
6589 @kindex --no-opd-optimize
6590 @item --no-opd-optimize
6591 PowerPC64 @command{ld} normally removes @code{.opd} section entries
6592 corresponding to deleted link-once functions, or functions removed by
6593 the action of @samp{--gc-sections} or linker script @code{/DISCARD/}.
6594 Use this option to disable @code{.opd} optimization.
6595
6596 @cindex PowerPC64 OPD spacing
6597 @kindex --non-overlapping-opd
6598 @item --non-overlapping-opd
6599 Some PowerPC64 compilers have an option to generate compressed
6600 @code{.opd} entries spaced 16 bytes apart, overlapping the third word,
6601 the static chain pointer (unused in C) with the first word of the next
6602 entry. This option expands such entries to the full 24 bytes.
6603
6604 @cindex PowerPC64 TOC optimization
6605 @kindex --no-toc-optimize
6606 @item --no-toc-optimize
6607 PowerPC64 @command{ld} normally removes unused @code{.toc} section
6608 entries. Such entries are detected by examining relocations that
6609 reference the TOC in code sections. A reloc in a deleted code section
6610 marks a TOC word as unneeded, while a reloc in a kept code section
6611 marks a TOC word as needed. Since the TOC may reference itself, TOC
6612 relocs are also examined. TOC words marked as both needed and
6613 unneeded will of course be kept. TOC words without any referencing
6614 reloc are assumed to be part of a multi-word entry, and are kept or
6615 discarded as per the nearest marked preceding word. This works
6616 reliably for compiler generated code, but may be incorrect if assembly
6617 code is used to insert TOC entries. Use this option to disable the
6618 optimization.
6619
6620 @cindex PowerPC64 multi-TOC
6621 @kindex --no-multi-toc
6622 @item --no-multi-toc
6623 By default, PowerPC64 GCC generates code for a TOC model where TOC
6624 entries are accessed with a 16-bit offset from r2. This limits the
6625 total TOC size to 64K. PowerPC64 @command{ld} extends this limit by
6626 grouping code sections such that each group uses less than 64K for its
6627 TOC entries, then inserts r2 adjusting stubs between inter-group
6628 calls. @command{ld} does not split apart input sections, so cannot
6629 help if a single input file has a @code{.toc} section that exceeds
6630 64K, most likely from linking multiple files with @command{ld -r}.
6631 Use this option to turn off this feature.
6632 @end table
6633
6634 @ifclear GENERIC
6635 @lowersections
6636 @end ifclear
6637 @end ifset
6638
6639 @ifset SPU
6640 @ifclear GENERIC
6641 @raisesections
6642 @end ifclear
6643
6644 @node SPU ELF
6645 @section @command{ld} and SPU ELF Support
6646
6647 @cindex SPU ELF options
6648 @table @option
6649
6650 @cindex SPU plugins
6651 @kindex --plugin
6652 @item --plugin
6653 This option marks an executable as a PIC plugin module.
6654
6655 @cindex SPU overlays
6656 @kindex --no-overlays
6657 @item --no-overlays
6658 Normally, @command{ld} recognizes calls to functions within overlay
6659 regions, and redirects such calls to an overlay manager via a stub.
6660 @command{ld} also provides a built-in overlay manager. This option
6661 turns off all this special overlay handling.
6662
6663 @cindex SPU overlay stub symbols
6664 @kindex --emit-stub-syms
6665 @item --emit-stub-syms
6666 This option causes @command{ld} to label overlay stubs with a local
6667 symbol that encodes the stub type and destination.
6668
6669 @cindex SPU extra overlay stubs
6670 @kindex --extra-overlay-stubs
6671 @item --extra-overlay-stubs
6672 This option causes @command{ld} to add overlay call stubs on all
6673 function calls out of overlay regions. Normally stubs are not added
6674 on calls to non-overlay regions.
6675
6676 @cindex SPU local store size
6677 @kindex --local-store=lo:hi
6678 @item --local-store=lo:hi
6679 @command{ld} usually checks that a final executable for SPU fits in
6680 the address range 0 to 256k. This option may be used to change the
6681 range. Disable the check entirely with @option{--local-store=0:0}.
6682
6683 @cindex SPU
6684 @kindex --stack-analysis
6685 @item --stack-analysis
6686 SPU local store space is limited. Over-allocation of stack space
6687 unnecessarily limits space available for code and data, while
6688 under-allocation results in runtime failures. If given this option,
6689 @command{ld} will provide an estimate of maximum stack usage.
6690 @command{ld} does this by examining symbols in code sections to
6691 determine the extents of functions, and looking at function prologues
6692 for stack adjusting instructions. A call-graph is created by looking
6693 for relocations on branch instructions. The graph is then searched
6694 for the maximum stack usage path. Note that this analysis does not
6695 find calls made via function pointers, and does not handle recursion
6696 and other cycles in the call graph. Stack usage may be
6697 under-estimated if your code makes such calls. Also, stack usage for
6698 dynamic allocation, e.g. alloca, will not be detected. If a link map
6699 is requested, detailed information about each function's stack usage
6700 and calls will be given.
6701
6702 @cindex SPU
6703 @kindex --emit-stack-syms
6704 @item --emit-stack-syms
6705 This option, if given along with @option{--stack-analysis} will result
6706 in @command{ld} emitting stack sizing symbols for each function.
6707 These take the form @code{__stack_<function_name>} for global
6708 functions, and @code{__stack_<number>_<function_name>} for static
6709 functions. @code{<number>} is the section id in hex. The value of
6710 such symbols is the stack requirement for the corresponding function.
6711 The symbol size will be zero, type @code{STT_NOTYPE}, binding
6712 @code{STB_LOCAL}, and section @code{SHN_ABS}.
6713 @end table
6714
6715 @ifclear GENERIC
6716 @lowersections
6717 @end ifclear
6718 @end ifset
6719
6720 @ifset TICOFF
6721 @ifclear GENERIC
6722 @raisesections
6723 @end ifclear
6724
6725 @node TI COFF
6726 @section @command{ld}'s Support for Various TI COFF Versions
6727 @cindex TI COFF versions
6728 @kindex --format=@var{version}
6729 The @samp{--format} switch allows selection of one of the various
6730 TI COFF versions. The latest of this writing is 2; versions 0 and 1 are
6731 also supported. The TI COFF versions also vary in header byte-order
6732 format; @command{ld} will read any version or byte order, but the output
6733 header format depends on the default specified by the specific target.
6734
6735 @ifclear GENERIC
6736 @lowersections
6737 @end ifclear
6738 @end ifset
6739
6740 @ifset WIN32
6741 @ifclear GENERIC
6742 @raisesections
6743 @end ifclear
6744
6745 @node WIN32
6746 @section @command{ld} and WIN32 (cygwin/mingw)
6747
6748 This section describes some of the win32 specific @command{ld} issues.
6749 See @ref{Options,,Command Line Options} for detailed description of the
6750 command line options mentioned here.
6751
6752 @table @emph
6753 @cindex import libraries
6754 @item import libraries
6755 The standard Windows linker creates and uses so-called import
6756 libraries, which contains information for linking to dll's. They are
6757 regular static archives and are handled as any other static
6758 archive. The cygwin and mingw ports of @command{ld} have specific
6759 support for creating such libraries provided with the
6760 @samp{--out-implib} command line option.
6761
6762 @item exporting DLL symbols
6763 @cindex exporting DLL symbols
6764 The cygwin/mingw @command{ld} has several ways to export symbols for dll's.
6765
6766 @table @emph
6767 @item using auto-export functionality
6768 @cindex using auto-export functionality
6769 By default @command{ld} exports symbols with the auto-export functionality,
6770 which is controlled by the following command line options:
6771
6772 @itemize
6773 @item --export-all-symbols [This is the default]
6774 @item --exclude-symbols
6775 @item --exclude-libs
6776 @item --exclude-modules-for-implib
6777 @item --version-script
6778 @end itemize
6779
6780 When auto-export is in operation, @command{ld} will export all the non-local
6781 (global and common) symbols it finds in a DLL, with the exception of a few
6782 symbols known to belong to the system's runtime and libraries. As it will
6783 often not be desirable to export all of a DLL's symbols, which may include
6784 private functions that are not part of any public interface, the command-line
6785 options listed above may be used to filter symbols out from the list for
6786 exporting. The @samp{--output-def} option can be used in order to see the
6787 final list of exported symbols with all exclusions taken into effect.
6788
6789 If @samp{--export-all-symbols} is not given explicitly on the
6790 command line, then the default auto-export behavior will be @emph{disabled}
6791 if either of the following are true:
6792
6793 @itemize
6794 @item A DEF file is used.
6795 @item Any symbol in any object file was marked with the __declspec(dllexport) attribute.
6796 @end itemize
6797
6798 @item using a DEF file
6799 @cindex using a DEF file
6800 Another way of exporting symbols is using a DEF file. A DEF file is
6801 an ASCII file containing definitions of symbols which should be
6802 exported when a dll is created. Usually it is named @samp{<dll
6803 name>.def} and is added as any other object file to the linker's
6804 command line. The file's name must end in @samp{.def} or @samp{.DEF}.
6805
6806 @example
6807 gcc -o <output> <objectfiles> <dll name>.def
6808 @end example
6809
6810 Using a DEF file turns off the normal auto-export behavior, unless the
6811 @samp{--export-all-symbols} option is also used.
6812
6813 Here is an example of a DEF file for a shared library called @samp{xyz.dll}:
6814
6815 @example
6816 LIBRARY "xyz.dll" BASE=0x20000000
6817
6818 EXPORTS
6819 foo
6820 bar
6821 _bar = bar
6822 another_foo = abc.dll.afoo
6823 var1 DATA
6824 doo = foo == foo2
6825 eoo DATA == var1
6826 @end example
6827
6828 This example defines a DLL with a non-default base address and seven
6829 symbols in the export table. The third exported symbol @code{_bar} is an
6830 alias for the second. The fourth symbol, @code{another_foo} is resolved
6831 by "forwarding" to another module and treating it as an alias for
6832 @code{afoo} exported from the DLL @samp{abc.dll}. The final symbol
6833 @code{var1} is declared to be a data object. The @samp{doo} symbol in
6834 export library is an alias of @samp{foo}, which gets the string name
6835 in export table @samp{foo2}. The @samp{eoo} symbol is an data export
6836 symbol, which gets in export table the name @samp{var1}.
6837
6838 The optional @code{LIBRARY <name>} command indicates the @emph{internal}
6839 name of the output DLL. If @samp{<name>} does not include a suffix,
6840 the default library suffix, @samp{.DLL} is appended.
6841
6842 When the .DEF file is used to build an application, rather than a
6843 library, the @code{NAME <name>} command should be used instead of
6844 @code{LIBRARY}. If @samp{<name>} does not include a suffix, the default
6845 executable suffix, @samp{.EXE} is appended.
6846
6847 With either @code{LIBRARY <name>} or @code{NAME <name>} the optional
6848 specification @code{BASE = <number>} may be used to specify a
6849 non-default base address for the image.
6850
6851 If neither @code{LIBRARY <name>} nor @code{NAME <name>} is specified,
6852 or they specify an empty string, the internal name is the same as the
6853 filename specified on the command line.
6854
6855 The complete specification of an export symbol is:
6856
6857 @example
6858 EXPORTS
6859 ( ( ( <name1> [ = <name2> ] )
6860 | ( <name1> = <module-name> . <external-name>))
6861 [ @@ <integer> ] [NONAME] [DATA] [CONSTANT] [PRIVATE] [== <name3>] ) *
6862 @end example
6863
6864 Declares @samp{<name1>} as an exported symbol from the DLL, or declares
6865 @samp{<name1>} as an exported alias for @samp{<name2>}; or declares
6866 @samp{<name1>} as a "forward" alias for the symbol
6867 @samp{<external-name>} in the DLL @samp{<module-name>}.
6868 Optionally, the symbol may be exported by the specified ordinal
6869 @samp{<integer>} alias. The optional @samp{<name3>} is the to be used
6870 string in import/export table for the symbol.
6871
6872 The optional keywords that follow the declaration indicate:
6873
6874 @code{NONAME}: Do not put the symbol name in the DLL's export table. It
6875 will still be exported by its ordinal alias (either the value specified
6876 by the .def specification or, otherwise, the value assigned by the
6877 linker). The symbol name, however, does remain visible in the import
6878 library (if any), unless @code{PRIVATE} is also specified.
6879
6880 @code{DATA}: The symbol is a variable or object, rather than a function.
6881 The import lib will export only an indirect reference to @code{foo} as
6882 the symbol @code{_imp__foo} (ie, @code{foo} must be resolved as
6883 @code{*_imp__foo}).
6884
6885 @code{CONSTANT}: Like @code{DATA}, but put the undecorated @code{foo} as
6886 well as @code{_imp__foo} into the import library. Both refer to the
6887 read-only import address table's pointer to the variable, not to the
6888 variable itself. This can be dangerous. If the user code fails to add
6889 the @code{dllimport} attribute and also fails to explicitly add the
6890 extra indirection that the use of the attribute enforces, the
6891 application will behave unexpectedly.
6892
6893 @code{PRIVATE}: Put the symbol in the DLL's export table, but do not put
6894 it into the static import library used to resolve imports at link time. The
6895 symbol can still be imported using the @code{LoadLibrary/GetProcAddress}
6896 API at runtime or by by using the GNU ld extension of linking directly to
6897 the DLL without an import library.
6898
6899 See ld/deffilep.y in the binutils sources for the full specification of
6900 other DEF file statements
6901
6902 @cindex creating a DEF file
6903 While linking a shared dll, @command{ld} is able to create a DEF file
6904 with the @samp{--output-def <file>} command line option.
6905
6906 @item Using decorations
6907 @cindex Using decorations
6908 Another way of marking symbols for export is to modify the source code
6909 itself, so that when building the DLL each symbol to be exported is
6910 declared as:
6911
6912 @example
6913 __declspec(dllexport) int a_variable
6914 __declspec(dllexport) void a_function(int with_args)
6915 @end example
6916
6917 All such symbols will be exported from the DLL. If, however,
6918 any of the object files in the DLL contain symbols decorated in
6919 this way, then the normal auto-export behavior is disabled, unless
6920 the @samp{--export-all-symbols} option is also used.
6921
6922 Note that object files that wish to access these symbols must @emph{not}
6923 decorate them with dllexport. Instead, they should use dllimport,
6924 instead:
6925
6926 @example
6927 __declspec(dllimport) int a_variable
6928 __declspec(dllimport) void a_function(int with_args)
6929 @end example
6930
6931 This complicates the structure of library header files, because
6932 when included by the library itself the header must declare the
6933 variables and functions as dllexport, but when included by client
6934 code the header must declare them as dllimport. There are a number
6935 of idioms that are typically used to do this; often client code can
6936 omit the __declspec() declaration completely. See
6937 @samp{--enable-auto-import} and @samp{automatic data imports} for more
6938 information.
6939 @end table
6940
6941 @cindex automatic data imports
6942 @item automatic data imports
6943 The standard Windows dll format supports data imports from dlls only
6944 by adding special decorations (dllimport/dllexport), which let the
6945 compiler produce specific assembler instructions to deal with this
6946 issue. This increases the effort necessary to port existing Un*x
6947 code to these platforms, especially for large
6948 c++ libraries and applications. The auto-import feature, which was
6949 initially provided by Paul Sokolovsky, allows one to omit the
6950 decorations to achieve a behavior that conforms to that on POSIX/Un*x
6951 platforms. This feature is enabled with the @samp{--enable-auto-import}
6952 command-line option, although it is enabled by default on cygwin/mingw.
6953 The @samp{--enable-auto-import} option itself now serves mainly to
6954 suppress any warnings that are ordinarily emitted when linked objects
6955 trigger the feature's use.
6956
6957 auto-import of variables does not always work flawlessly without
6958 additional assistance. Sometimes, you will see this message
6959
6960 "variable '<var>' can't be auto-imported. Please read the
6961 documentation for ld's @code{--enable-auto-import} for details."
6962
6963 The @samp{--enable-auto-import} documentation explains why this error
6964 occurs, and several methods that can be used to overcome this difficulty.
6965 One of these methods is the @emph{runtime pseudo-relocs} feature, described
6966 below.
6967
6968 @cindex runtime pseudo-relocation
6969 For complex variables imported from DLLs (such as structs or classes),
6970 object files typically contain a base address for the variable and an
6971 offset (@emph{addend}) within the variable--to specify a particular
6972 field or public member, for instance. Unfortunately, the runtime loader used
6973 in win32 environments is incapable of fixing these references at runtime
6974 without the additional information supplied by dllimport/dllexport decorations.
6975 The standard auto-import feature described above is unable to resolve these
6976 references.
6977
6978 The @samp{--enable-runtime-pseudo-relocs} switch allows these references to
6979 be resolved without error, while leaving the task of adjusting the references
6980 themselves (with their non-zero addends) to specialized code provided by the
6981 runtime environment. Recent versions of the cygwin and mingw environments and
6982 compilers provide this runtime support; older versions do not. However, the
6983 support is only necessary on the developer's platform; the compiled result will
6984 run without error on an older system.
6985
6986 @samp{--enable-runtime-pseudo-relocs} is not the default; it must be explicitly
6987 enabled as needed.
6988
6989 @cindex direct linking to a dll
6990 @item direct linking to a dll
6991 The cygwin/mingw ports of @command{ld} support the direct linking,
6992 including data symbols, to a dll without the usage of any import
6993 libraries. This is much faster and uses much less memory than does the
6994 traditional import library method, especially when linking large
6995 libraries or applications. When @command{ld} creates an import lib, each
6996 function or variable exported from the dll is stored in its own bfd, even
6997 though a single bfd could contain many exports. The overhead involved in
6998 storing, loading, and processing so many bfd's is quite large, and explains the
6999 tremendous time, memory, and storage needed to link against particularly
7000 large or complex libraries when using import libs.
7001
7002 Linking directly to a dll uses no extra command-line switches other than
7003 @samp{-L} and @samp{-l}, because @command{ld} already searches for a number
7004 of names to match each library. All that is needed from the developer's
7005 perspective is an understanding of this search, in order to force ld to
7006 select the dll instead of an import library.
7007
7008
7009 For instance, when ld is called with the argument @samp{-lxxx} it will attempt
7010 to find, in the first directory of its search path,
7011
7012 @example
7013 libxxx.dll.a
7014 xxx.dll.a
7015 libxxx.a
7016 xxx.lib
7017 cygxxx.dll (*)
7018 libxxx.dll
7019 xxx.dll
7020 @end example
7021
7022 before moving on to the next directory in the search path.
7023
7024 (*) Actually, this is not @samp{cygxxx.dll} but in fact is @samp{<prefix>xxx.dll},
7025 where @samp{<prefix>} is set by the @command{ld} option
7026 @samp{--dll-search-prefix=<prefix>}. In the case of cygwin, the standard gcc spec
7027 file includes @samp{--dll-search-prefix=cyg}, so in effect we actually search for
7028 @samp{cygxxx.dll}.
7029
7030 Other win32-based unix environments, such as mingw or pw32, may use other
7031 @samp{<prefix>}es, although at present only cygwin makes use of this feature. It
7032 was originally intended to help avoid name conflicts among dll's built for the
7033 various win32/un*x environments, so that (for example) two versions of a zlib dll
7034 could coexist on the same machine.
7035
7036 The generic cygwin/mingw path layout uses a @samp{bin} directory for
7037 applications and dll's and a @samp{lib} directory for the import
7038 libraries (using cygwin nomenclature):
7039
7040 @example
7041 bin/
7042 cygxxx.dll
7043 lib/
7044 libxxx.dll.a (in case of dll's)
7045 libxxx.a (in case of static archive)
7046 @end example
7047
7048 Linking directly to a dll without using the import library can be
7049 done two ways:
7050
7051 1. Use the dll directly by adding the @samp{bin} path to the link line
7052 @example
7053 gcc -Wl,-verbose -o a.exe -L../bin/ -lxxx
7054 @end example
7055
7056 However, as the dll's often have version numbers appended to their names
7057 (@samp{cygncurses-5.dll}) this will often fail, unless one specifies
7058 @samp{-L../bin -lncurses-5} to include the version. Import libs are generally
7059 not versioned, and do not have this difficulty.
7060
7061 2. Create a symbolic link from the dll to a file in the @samp{lib}
7062 directory according to the above mentioned search pattern. This
7063 should be used to avoid unwanted changes in the tools needed for
7064 making the app/dll.
7065
7066 @example
7067 ln -s bin/cygxxx.dll lib/[cyg|lib|]xxx.dll[.a]
7068 @end example
7069
7070 Then you can link without any make environment changes.
7071
7072 @example
7073 gcc -Wl,-verbose -o a.exe -L../lib/ -lxxx
7074 @end example
7075
7076 This technique also avoids the version number problems, because the following is
7077 perfectly legal
7078
7079 @example
7080 bin/
7081 cygxxx-5.dll
7082 lib/
7083 libxxx.dll.a -> ../bin/cygxxx-5.dll
7084 @end example
7085
7086 Linking directly to a dll without using an import lib will work
7087 even when auto-import features are exercised, and even when
7088 @samp{--enable-runtime-pseudo-relocs} is used.
7089
7090 Given the improvements in speed and memory usage, one might justifiably
7091 wonder why import libraries are used at all. There are three reasons:
7092
7093 1. Until recently, the link-directly-to-dll functionality did @emph{not}
7094 work with auto-imported data.
7095
7096 2. Sometimes it is necessary to include pure static objects within the
7097 import library (which otherwise contains only bfd's for indirection
7098 symbols that point to the exports of a dll). Again, the import lib
7099 for the cygwin kernel makes use of this ability, and it is not
7100 possible to do this without an import lib.
7101
7102 3. Symbol aliases can only be resolved using an import lib. This is
7103 critical when linking against OS-supplied dll's (eg, the win32 API)
7104 in which symbols are usually exported as undecorated aliases of their
7105 stdcall-decorated assembly names.
7106
7107 So, import libs are not going away. But the ability to replace
7108 true import libs with a simple symbolic link to (or a copy of)
7109 a dll, in many cases, is a useful addition to the suite of tools
7110 binutils makes available to the win32 developer. Given the
7111 massive improvements in memory requirements during linking, storage
7112 requirements, and linking speed, we expect that many developers
7113 will soon begin to use this feature whenever possible.
7114
7115 @item symbol aliasing
7116 @table @emph
7117 @item adding additional names
7118 Sometimes, it is useful to export symbols with additional names.
7119 A symbol @samp{foo} will be exported as @samp{foo}, but it can also be
7120 exported as @samp{_foo} by using special directives in the DEF file
7121 when creating the dll. This will affect also the optional created
7122 import library. Consider the following DEF file:
7123
7124 @example
7125 LIBRARY "xyz.dll" BASE=0x61000000
7126
7127 EXPORTS
7128 foo
7129 _foo = foo
7130 @end example
7131
7132 The line @samp{_foo = foo} maps the symbol @samp{foo} to @samp{_foo}.
7133
7134 Another method for creating a symbol alias is to create it in the
7135 source code using the "weak" attribute:
7136
7137 @example
7138 void foo () @{ /* Do something. */; @}
7139 void _foo () __attribute__ ((weak, alias ("foo")));
7140 @end example
7141
7142 See the gcc manual for more information about attributes and weak
7143 symbols.
7144
7145 @item renaming symbols
7146 Sometimes it is useful to rename exports. For instance, the cygwin
7147 kernel does this regularly. A symbol @samp{_foo} can be exported as
7148 @samp{foo} but not as @samp{_foo} by using special directives in the
7149 DEF file. (This will also affect the import library, if it is
7150 created). In the following example:
7151
7152 @example
7153 LIBRARY "xyz.dll" BASE=0x61000000
7154
7155 EXPORTS
7156 _foo = foo
7157 @end example
7158
7159 The line @samp{_foo = foo} maps the exported symbol @samp{foo} to
7160 @samp{_foo}.
7161 @end table
7162
7163 Note: using a DEF file disables the default auto-export behavior,
7164 unless the @samp{--export-all-symbols} command line option is used.
7165 If, however, you are trying to rename symbols, then you should list
7166 @emph{all} desired exports in the DEF file, including the symbols
7167 that are not being renamed, and do @emph{not} use the
7168 @samp{--export-all-symbols} option. If you list only the
7169 renamed symbols in the DEF file, and use @samp{--export-all-symbols}
7170 to handle the other symbols, then the both the new names @emph{and}
7171 the original names for the renamed symbols will be exported.
7172 In effect, you'd be aliasing those symbols, not renaming them,
7173 which is probably not what you wanted.
7174
7175 @cindex weak externals
7176 @item weak externals
7177 The Windows object format, PE, specifies a form of weak symbols called
7178 weak externals. When a weak symbol is linked and the symbol is not
7179 defined, the weak symbol becomes an alias for some other symbol. There
7180 are three variants of weak externals:
7181 @itemize
7182 @item Definition is searched for in objects and libraries, historically
7183 called lazy externals.
7184 @item Definition is searched for only in other objects, not in libraries.
7185 This form is not presently implemented.
7186 @item No search; the symbol is an alias. This form is not presently
7187 implemented.
7188 @end itemize
7189 As a GNU extension, weak symbols that do not specify an alternate symbol
7190 are supported. If the symbol is undefined when linking, the symbol
7191 uses a default value.
7192
7193 @cindex aligned common symbols
7194 @item aligned common symbols
7195 As a GNU extension to the PE file format, it is possible to specify the
7196 desired alignment for a common symbol. This information is conveyed from
7197 the assembler or compiler to the linker by means of GNU-specific commands
7198 carried in the object file's @samp{.drectve} section, which are recognized
7199 by @command{ld} and respected when laying out the common symbols. Native
7200 tools will be able to process object files employing this GNU extension,
7201 but will fail to respect the alignment instructions, and may issue noisy
7202 warnings about unknown linker directives.
7203 @end table
7204
7205 @ifclear GENERIC
7206 @lowersections
7207 @end ifclear
7208 @end ifset
7209
7210 @ifset XTENSA
7211 @ifclear GENERIC
7212 @raisesections
7213 @end ifclear
7214
7215 @node Xtensa
7216 @section @code{ld} and Xtensa Processors
7217
7218 @cindex Xtensa processors
7219 The default @command{ld} behavior for Xtensa processors is to interpret
7220 @code{SECTIONS} commands so that lists of explicitly named sections in a
7221 specification with a wildcard file will be interleaved when necessary to
7222 keep literal pools within the range of PC-relative load offsets. For
7223 example, with the command:
7224
7225 @smallexample
7226 SECTIONS
7227 @{
7228 .text : @{
7229 *(.literal .text)
7230 @}
7231 @}
7232 @end smallexample
7233
7234 @noindent
7235 @command{ld} may interleave some of the @code{.literal}
7236 and @code{.text} sections from different object files to ensure that the
7237 literal pools are within the range of PC-relative load offsets. A valid
7238 interleaving might place the @code{.literal} sections from an initial
7239 group of files followed by the @code{.text} sections of that group of
7240 files. Then, the @code{.literal} sections from the rest of the files
7241 and the @code{.text} sections from the rest of the files would follow.
7242
7243 @cindex @option{--relax} on Xtensa
7244 @cindex relaxing on Xtensa
7245 Relaxation is enabled by default for the Xtensa version of @command{ld} and
7246 provides two important link-time optimizations. The first optimization
7247 is to combine identical literal values to reduce code size. A redundant
7248 literal will be removed and all the @code{L32R} instructions that use it
7249 will be changed to reference an identical literal, as long as the
7250 location of the replacement literal is within the offset range of all
7251 the @code{L32R} instructions. The second optimization is to remove
7252 unnecessary overhead from assembler-generated ``longcall'' sequences of
7253 @code{L32R}/@code{CALLX@var{n}} when the target functions are within
7254 range of direct @code{CALL@var{n}} instructions.
7255
7256 For each of these cases where an indirect call sequence can be optimized
7257 to a direct call, the linker will change the @code{CALLX@var{n}}
7258 instruction to a @code{CALL@var{n}} instruction, remove the @code{L32R}
7259 instruction, and remove the literal referenced by the @code{L32R}
7260 instruction if it is not used for anything else. Removing the
7261 @code{L32R} instruction always reduces code size but can potentially
7262 hurt performance by changing the alignment of subsequent branch targets.
7263 By default, the linker will always preserve alignments, either by
7264 switching some instructions between 24-bit encodings and the equivalent
7265 density instructions or by inserting a no-op in place of the @code{L32R}
7266 instruction that was removed. If code size is more important than
7267 performance, the @option{--size-opt} option can be used to prevent the
7268 linker from widening density instructions or inserting no-ops, except in
7269 a few cases where no-ops are required for correctness.
7270
7271 The following Xtensa-specific command-line options can be used to
7272 control the linker:
7273
7274 @cindex Xtensa options
7275 @table @option
7276 @item --size-opt
7277 When optimizing indirect calls to direct calls, optimize for code size
7278 more than performance. With this option, the linker will not insert
7279 no-ops or widen density instructions to preserve branch target
7280 alignment. There may still be some cases where no-ops are required to
7281 preserve the correctness of the code.
7282 @end table
7283
7284 @ifclear GENERIC
7285 @lowersections
7286 @end ifclear
7287 @end ifset
7288
7289 @ifclear SingleFormat
7290 @node BFD
7291 @chapter BFD
7292
7293 @cindex back end
7294 @cindex object file management
7295 @cindex object formats available
7296 @kindex objdump -i
7297 The linker accesses object and archive files using the BFD libraries.
7298 These libraries allow the linker to use the same routines to operate on
7299 object files whatever the object file format. A different object file
7300 format can be supported simply by creating a new BFD back end and adding
7301 it to the library. To conserve runtime memory, however, the linker and
7302 associated tools are usually configured to support only a subset of the
7303 object file formats available. You can use @code{objdump -i}
7304 (@pxref{objdump,,objdump,binutils.info,The GNU Binary Utilities}) to
7305 list all the formats available for your configuration.
7306
7307 @cindex BFD requirements
7308 @cindex requirements for BFD
7309 As with most implementations, BFD is a compromise between
7310 several conflicting requirements. The major factor influencing
7311 BFD design was efficiency: any time used converting between
7312 formats is time which would not have been spent had BFD not
7313 been involved. This is partly offset by abstraction payback; since
7314 BFD simplifies applications and back ends, more time and care
7315 may be spent optimizing algorithms for a greater speed.
7316
7317 One minor artifact of the BFD solution which you should bear in
7318 mind is the potential for information loss. There are two places where
7319 useful information can be lost using the BFD mechanism: during
7320 conversion and during output. @xref{BFD information loss}.
7321
7322 @menu
7323 * BFD outline:: How it works: an outline of BFD
7324 @end menu
7325
7326 @node BFD outline
7327 @section How It Works: An Outline of BFD
7328 @cindex opening object files
7329 @include bfdsumm.texi
7330 @end ifclear
7331
7332 @node Reporting Bugs
7333 @chapter Reporting Bugs
7334 @cindex bugs in @command{ld}
7335 @cindex reporting bugs in @command{ld}
7336
7337 Your bug reports play an essential role in making @command{ld} reliable.
7338
7339 Reporting a bug may help you by bringing a solution to your problem, or
7340 it may not. But in any case the principal function of a bug report is
7341 to help the entire community by making the next version of @command{ld}
7342 work better. Bug reports are your contribution to the maintenance of
7343 @command{ld}.
7344
7345 In order for a bug report to serve its purpose, you must include the
7346 information that enables us to fix the bug.
7347
7348 @menu
7349 * Bug Criteria:: Have you found a bug?
7350 * Bug Reporting:: How to report bugs
7351 @end menu
7352
7353 @node Bug Criteria
7354 @section Have You Found a Bug?
7355 @cindex bug criteria
7356
7357 If you are not sure whether you have found a bug, here are some guidelines:
7358
7359 @itemize @bullet
7360 @cindex fatal signal
7361 @cindex linker crash
7362 @cindex crash of linker
7363 @item
7364 If the linker gets a fatal signal, for any input whatever, that is a
7365 @command{ld} bug. Reliable linkers never crash.
7366
7367 @cindex error on valid input
7368 @item
7369 If @command{ld} produces an error message for valid input, that is a bug.
7370
7371 @cindex invalid input
7372 @item
7373 If @command{ld} does not produce an error message for invalid input, that
7374 may be a bug. In the general case, the linker can not verify that
7375 object files are correct.
7376
7377 @item
7378 If you are an experienced user of linkers, your suggestions for
7379 improvement of @command{ld} are welcome in any case.
7380 @end itemize
7381
7382 @node Bug Reporting
7383 @section How to Report Bugs
7384 @cindex bug reports
7385 @cindex @command{ld} bugs, reporting
7386
7387 A number of companies and individuals offer support for @sc{gnu}
7388 products. If you obtained @command{ld} from a support organization, we
7389 recommend you contact that organization first.
7390
7391 You can find contact information for many support companies and
7392 individuals in the file @file{etc/SERVICE} in the @sc{gnu} Emacs
7393 distribution.
7394
7395 @ifset BUGURL
7396 Otherwise, send bug reports for @command{ld} to
7397 @value{BUGURL}.
7398 @end ifset
7399
7400 The fundamental principle of reporting bugs usefully is this:
7401 @strong{report all the facts}. If you are not sure whether to state a
7402 fact or leave it out, state it!
7403
7404 Often people omit facts because they think they know what causes the
7405 problem and assume that some details do not matter. Thus, you might
7406 assume that the name of a symbol you use in an example does not
7407 matter. Well, probably it does not, but one cannot be sure. Perhaps
7408 the bug is a stray memory reference which happens to fetch from the
7409 location where that name is stored in memory; perhaps, if the name
7410 were different, the contents of that location would fool the linker
7411 into doing the right thing despite the bug. Play it safe and give a
7412 specific, complete example. That is the easiest thing for you to do,
7413 and the most helpful.
7414
7415 Keep in mind that the purpose of a bug report is to enable us to fix
7416 the bug if it is new to us. Therefore, always write your bug reports
7417 on the assumption that the bug has not been reported previously.
7418
7419 Sometimes people give a few sketchy facts and ask, ``Does this ring a
7420 bell?'' This cannot help us fix a bug, so it is basically useless. We
7421 respond by asking for enough details to enable us to investigate.
7422 You might as well expedite matters by sending them to begin with.
7423
7424 To enable us to fix the bug, you should include all these things:
7425
7426 @itemize @bullet
7427 @item
7428 The version of @command{ld}. @command{ld} announces it if you start it with
7429 the @samp{--version} argument.
7430
7431 Without this, we will not know whether there is any point in looking for
7432 the bug in the current version of @command{ld}.
7433
7434 @item
7435 Any patches you may have applied to the @command{ld} source, including any
7436 patches made to the @code{BFD} library.
7437
7438 @item
7439 The type of machine you are using, and the operating system name and
7440 version number.
7441
7442 @item
7443 What compiler (and its version) was used to compile @command{ld}---e.g.
7444 ``@code{gcc-2.7}''.
7445
7446 @item
7447 The command arguments you gave the linker to link your example and
7448 observe the bug. To guarantee you will not omit something important,
7449 list them all. A copy of the Makefile (or the output from make) is
7450 sufficient.
7451
7452 If we were to try to guess the arguments, we would probably guess wrong
7453 and then we might not encounter the bug.
7454
7455 @item
7456 A complete input file, or set of input files, that will reproduce the
7457 bug. It is generally most helpful to send the actual object files
7458 provided that they are reasonably small. Say no more than 10K. For
7459 bigger files you can either make them available by FTP or HTTP or else
7460 state that you are willing to send the object file(s) to whomever
7461 requests them. (Note - your email will be going to a mailing list, so
7462 we do not want to clog it up with large attachments). But small
7463 attachments are best.
7464
7465 If the source files were assembled using @code{gas} or compiled using
7466 @code{gcc}, then it may be OK to send the source files rather than the
7467 object files. In this case, be sure to say exactly what version of
7468 @code{gas} or @code{gcc} was used to produce the object files. Also say
7469 how @code{gas} or @code{gcc} were configured.
7470
7471 @item
7472 A description of what behavior you observe that you believe is
7473 incorrect. For example, ``It gets a fatal signal.''
7474
7475 Of course, if the bug is that @command{ld} gets a fatal signal, then we
7476 will certainly notice it. But if the bug is incorrect output, we might
7477 not notice unless it is glaringly wrong. You might as well not give us
7478 a chance to make a mistake.
7479
7480 Even if the problem you experience is a fatal signal, you should still
7481 say so explicitly. Suppose something strange is going on, such as, your
7482 copy of @command{ld} is out of sync, or you have encountered a bug in the
7483 C library on your system. (This has happened!) Your copy might crash
7484 and ours would not. If you told us to expect a crash, then when ours
7485 fails to crash, we would know that the bug was not happening for us. If
7486 you had not told us to expect a crash, then we would not be able to draw
7487 any conclusion from our observations.
7488
7489 @item
7490 If you wish to suggest changes to the @command{ld} source, send us context
7491 diffs, as generated by @code{diff} with the @samp{-u}, @samp{-c}, or
7492 @samp{-p} option. Always send diffs from the old file to the new file.
7493 If you even discuss something in the @command{ld} source, refer to it by
7494 context, not by line number.
7495
7496 The line numbers in our development sources will not match those in your
7497 sources. Your line numbers would convey no useful information to us.
7498 @end itemize
7499
7500 Here are some things that are not necessary:
7501
7502 @itemize @bullet
7503 @item
7504 A description of the envelope of the bug.
7505
7506 Often people who encounter a bug spend a lot of time investigating
7507 which changes to the input file will make the bug go away and which
7508 changes will not affect it.
7509
7510 This is often time consuming and not very useful, because the way we
7511 will find the bug is by running a single example under the debugger
7512 with breakpoints, not by pure deduction from a series of examples.
7513 We recommend that you save your time for something else.
7514
7515 Of course, if you can find a simpler example to report @emph{instead}
7516 of the original one, that is a convenience for us. Errors in the
7517 output will be easier to spot, running under the debugger will take
7518 less time, and so on.
7519
7520 However, simplification is not vital; if you do not want to do this,
7521 report the bug anyway and send us the entire test case you used.
7522
7523 @item
7524 A patch for the bug.
7525
7526 A patch for the bug does help us if it is a good one. But do not omit
7527 the necessary information, such as the test case, on the assumption that
7528 a patch is all we need. We might see problems with your patch and decide
7529 to fix the problem another way, or we might not understand it at all.
7530
7531 Sometimes with a program as complicated as @command{ld} it is very hard to
7532 construct an example that will make the program follow a certain path
7533 through the code. If you do not send us the example, we will not be
7534 able to construct one, so we will not be able to verify that the bug is
7535 fixed.
7536
7537 And if we cannot understand what bug you are trying to fix, or why your
7538 patch should be an improvement, we will not install it. A test case will
7539 help us to understand.
7540
7541 @item
7542 A guess about what the bug is or what it depends on.
7543
7544 Such guesses are usually wrong. Even we cannot guess right about such
7545 things without first using the debugger to find the facts.
7546 @end itemize
7547
7548 @node MRI
7549 @appendix MRI Compatible Script Files
7550 @cindex MRI compatibility
7551 To aid users making the transition to @sc{gnu} @command{ld} from the MRI
7552 linker, @command{ld} can use MRI compatible linker scripts as an
7553 alternative to the more general-purpose linker scripting language
7554 described in @ref{Scripts}. MRI compatible linker scripts have a much
7555 simpler command set than the scripting language otherwise used with
7556 @command{ld}. @sc{gnu} @command{ld} supports the most commonly used MRI
7557 linker commands; these commands are described here.
7558
7559 In general, MRI scripts aren't of much use with the @code{a.out} object
7560 file format, since it only has three sections and MRI scripts lack some
7561 features to make use of them.
7562
7563 You can specify a file containing an MRI-compatible script using the
7564 @samp{-c} command-line option.
7565
7566 Each command in an MRI-compatible script occupies its own line; each
7567 command line starts with the keyword that identifies the command (though
7568 blank lines are also allowed for punctuation). If a line of an
7569 MRI-compatible script begins with an unrecognized keyword, @command{ld}
7570 issues a warning message, but continues processing the script.
7571
7572 Lines beginning with @samp{*} are comments.
7573
7574 You can write these commands using all upper-case letters, or all
7575 lower case; for example, @samp{chip} is the same as @samp{CHIP}.
7576 The following list shows only the upper-case form of each command.
7577
7578 @table @code
7579 @cindex @code{ABSOLUTE} (MRI)
7580 @item ABSOLUTE @var{secname}
7581 @itemx ABSOLUTE @var{secname}, @var{secname}, @dots{} @var{secname}
7582 Normally, @command{ld} includes in the output file all sections from all
7583 the input files. However, in an MRI-compatible script, you can use the
7584 @code{ABSOLUTE} command to restrict the sections that will be present in
7585 your output program. If the @code{ABSOLUTE} command is used at all in a
7586 script, then only the sections named explicitly in @code{ABSOLUTE}
7587 commands will appear in the linker output. You can still use other
7588 input sections (whatever you select on the command line, or using
7589 @code{LOAD}) to resolve addresses in the output file.
7590
7591 @cindex @code{ALIAS} (MRI)
7592 @item ALIAS @var{out-secname}, @var{in-secname}
7593 Use this command to place the data from input section @var{in-secname}
7594 in a section called @var{out-secname} in the linker output file.
7595
7596 @var{in-secname} may be an integer.
7597
7598 @cindex @code{ALIGN} (MRI)
7599 @item ALIGN @var{secname} = @var{expression}
7600 Align the section called @var{secname} to @var{expression}. The
7601 @var{expression} should be a power of two.
7602
7603 @cindex @code{BASE} (MRI)
7604 @item BASE @var{expression}
7605 Use the value of @var{expression} as the lowest address (other than
7606 absolute addresses) in the output file.
7607
7608 @cindex @code{CHIP} (MRI)
7609 @item CHIP @var{expression}
7610 @itemx CHIP @var{expression}, @var{expression}
7611 This command does nothing; it is accepted only for compatibility.
7612
7613 @cindex @code{END} (MRI)
7614 @item END
7615 This command does nothing whatever; it's only accepted for compatibility.
7616
7617 @cindex @code{FORMAT} (MRI)
7618 @item FORMAT @var{output-format}
7619 Similar to the @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} command in the more general linker
7620 language, but restricted to one of these output formats:
7621
7622 @enumerate
7623 @item
7624 S-records, if @var{output-format} is @samp{S}
7625
7626 @item
7627 IEEE, if @var{output-format} is @samp{IEEE}
7628
7629 @item
7630 COFF (the @samp{coff-m68k} variant in BFD), if @var{output-format} is
7631 @samp{COFF}
7632 @end enumerate
7633
7634 @cindex @code{LIST} (MRI)
7635 @item LIST @var{anything}@dots{}
7636 Print (to the standard output file) a link map, as produced by the
7637 @command{ld} command-line option @samp{-M}.
7638
7639 The keyword @code{LIST} may be followed by anything on the
7640 same line, with no change in its effect.
7641
7642 @cindex @code{LOAD} (MRI)
7643 @item LOAD @var{filename}
7644 @itemx LOAD @var{filename}, @var{filename}, @dots{} @var{filename}
7645 Include one or more object file @var{filename} in the link; this has the
7646 same effect as specifying @var{filename} directly on the @command{ld}
7647 command line.
7648
7649 @cindex @code{NAME} (MRI)
7650 @item NAME @var{output-name}
7651 @var{output-name} is the name for the program produced by @command{ld}; the
7652 MRI-compatible command @code{NAME} is equivalent to the command-line
7653 option @samp{-o} or the general script language command @code{OUTPUT}.
7654
7655 @cindex @code{ORDER} (MRI)
7656 @item ORDER @var{secname}, @var{secname}, @dots{} @var{secname}
7657 @itemx ORDER @var{secname} @var{secname} @var{secname}
7658 Normally, @command{ld} orders the sections in its output file in the
7659 order in which they first appear in the input files. In an MRI-compatible
7660 script, you can override this ordering with the @code{ORDER} command. The
7661 sections you list with @code{ORDER} will appear first in your output
7662 file, in the order specified.
7663
7664 @cindex @code{PUBLIC} (MRI)
7665 @item PUBLIC @var{name}=@var{expression}
7666 @itemx PUBLIC @var{name},@var{expression}
7667 @itemx PUBLIC @var{name} @var{expression}
7668 Supply a value (@var{expression}) for external symbol
7669 @var{name} used in the linker input files.
7670
7671 @cindex @code{SECT} (MRI)
7672 @item SECT @var{secname}, @var{expression}
7673 @itemx SECT @var{secname}=@var{expression}
7674 @itemx SECT @var{secname} @var{expression}
7675 You can use any of these three forms of the @code{SECT} command to
7676 specify the start address (@var{expression}) for section @var{secname}.
7677 If you have more than one @code{SECT} statement for the same
7678 @var{secname}, only the @emph{first} sets the start address.
7679 @end table
7680
7681 @node GNU Free Documentation License
7682 @appendix GNU Free Documentation License
7683 @include fdl.texi
7684
7685 @node LD Index
7686 @unnumbered LD Index
7687
7688 @printindex cp
7689
7690 @tex
7691 % I think something like @colophon should be in texinfo. In the
7692 % meantime:
7693 \long\def\colophon{\hbox to0pt{}\vfill
7694 \centerline{The body of this manual is set in}
7695 \centerline{\fontname\tenrm,}
7696 \centerline{with headings in {\bf\fontname\tenbf}}
7697 \centerline{and examples in {\tt\fontname\tentt}.}
7698 \centerline{{\it\fontname\tenit\/} and}
7699 \centerline{{\sl\fontname\tensl\/}}
7700 \centerline{are used for emphasis.}\vfill}
7701 \page\colophon
7702 % Blame: doc@cygnus.com, 28mar91.
7703 @end tex
7704
7705 @bye
This page took 0.256996 seconds and 4 git commands to generate.